Home

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules User Manual, 1756-UM058G-EN-P

1. 1756 0416 1756 0A161 1756 0A8 1756 0N8 amp ACOUTPUT ACOUTPUT 4 AC OUTPUT 8 3 8 1 0 Status Indicator B st 01234567 0 OK Status S 01234567 Q sanscr vil Fuse Status Indicator NETT in Indicator st 89101121331415 K K ST 891011 12 1314 15 6 6 6 FUSE e 1756 0A8D 1756 0A8E 1756 0B16D N amp ACOUTPUT amp ACOUTPUT amp DCOUTPUT 3 3 3 qe quu 0 ST 01234567 301234567 0 Fault Status Indicator BB FLT 012 3 4567 K FUSE012 34567 K 8101234567 K ST 89 10 11 12 314 15 8 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 8 DIAGNOSTIC ELECTRONICALLY FUSED DIAGNOSTIC 1756 08161 1756 0B16IEF 1756 0B16E 1756 0V16E 1756 0B161S 1756 0G16 amp DCOUTPUT DCOUTPUT DCOUTPUT 8 Q Diagnostic Yir 3 ST 01234567 0 3101234567 0 Status e0A6 01234567 0 Fuse K ST 8 910 111213 1415 K H Indicator ST 89101112131 15 ST 8 9101112 13 1415 DIAG 8910 11 12 13 M 15 6 FUSE e 6 6 ELECTRONICALLY FUSED PEER DEVICE 1756 0B8l 1756 OB8l M
2. Standard Wiring CE Compliant Wiring 1756 1G16 1756 1616 1 0 Wire RRES N 1 IN 0 WN IE fe DAMNIS S E N3 IS iS IN 2 IN 3 EE 2 Eso a EE NS olo IN 4 T VoWire 4 IN 5 ae N 4 _ lt N7 ING AT IN 7 a N 6 DC Power Wire g ID eD B FF Dc CD FB DC COM 0 T L DC 0 DC COM 0 i F SRE E i i TED TED s na iB iB in s f mm INS EDD ms E dL m FDI nis Device IN 11 N 10 5 NUT LH Capacitor Gere D E E N 13 TES CIS N 12 ns BETIS naa l 8 T 15 ag IN 15 IES E IN 14 i isi DC 1 e e DC COM 1 De 1 4 ED IEB DC COM 1 Z5 C L Simplified Schematic 5DC 15K 1K MHT A Le WVx IN E gt o d d 15K 1K T MHT S V nC 3o DC COM C gt e e 148 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1756 1H161 ControlLogix DC 90 146V isolated input module Simplified Schematic 5V IN 0 i C GND 0 E VE C k EE BM M ControlLogix Display Backplane Interface Additional jumper bars may be purchased by using catalog number 1756 JMPR
3. 1756 IA16 Simplified Schematic I HZ EN ie IN 1 CD G3 no o pis E Daisy IN 3 i ie IN 2 i RIBs e WD e i g NT EGD HCD me ControlLogix Display cu D CO em E Tm DED me Leer eS 15 Di O Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 139 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 1A161 ControlLogix AC 79 132V isolated input module eem 1756 1A161 Simplified Schematic Isolated Wiring cw S 12200 120 e 18 NO o o o 0 IN 0 h L2 1 q 3 E N 1 p C 2 dt t f 122 o 12 2 le 5f N2 5 o o l2 L2 0 E Bo Eel 233 Tels 78 N 3 z AA if 0e U4o U4 IH re c5 N4 o o o t4 GND i 29 Ig NS 12 6 g Img N 6 ControlLogix Display 27 Dye D IN7 Jumper Bar 28 18 wep IN8 Backplane Cut to Length ia 5 Interface N 229 ED 20 9G N 9 p d L2 10 z2 21 4 N 10 o L2 11 p24 23 G N 11 i ra 12 12 qz 25 d N 12 Irin j L2 13 G 28 27K N 13 O A panes
4. M 1756 0B16IEFS Isolated Sourcing Simplified Schematic Isolated Wiring Output Wiring DC 0 DC0 4 o DC 0 18 0UT0 A O DCO J DC 1 OUT 1 Isolator C 2 d MES DC 2 O DC 2 ame s OUT2 o DC2 DC 3 OUT 3 8 TK 1 DC4 Haho ajep ours OUT 0 Sinking Output Wiring DC 5 gn nj OUT 5 DC DC8 UTS St Fault t Jg SOLES i g ie S nd SES Display ControlLogix DC r Cite s Ur Backplane Jumper Bar DC 8 Ehe 1E Ours Interface Cut to Length DC 9 CD 19 OUT 9 DC 10 q 22 2 e OUT 10 Surge Current Chart Nonisolated Me Cp zg d Nonisolated Wiring DC 12 CD 25 OUT 12 Sourcing Surge DC 13 Ales o6 OUT 13 e Output 4A DC 14 Eo 29 0UTM c ME Do 56 Frei ail Ours TN z Continuous 2 A 45 C 113 F DO o P DC 15 Tep s ss CD Not Used g 2A Fa Not Used aqe so Not Used oO ux Continuous 1 A 60 C 140 F 4 PE 1A d Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Additional jumper bars may be purchased 0 10 ms by using catalog number 1756 JMPR Time Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 165 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0B161S ControlLogix DC 10 30V scheduled isolated output module 1756 0B16lS Simplified Schematic 45V
5. 1756 0A161 Isolated Wiring 1 0 0 1 0 9 1 l2 outo O 120 L1 1 d 3 4 OUT 1 L2 Q 412 5 Cle OUT 2 A O 12 2 LLL v L1 3 7 amp D s 0UT 3 L4 O na HES 10 ole OUTA _9 24 5 TED 2 n EDD ours 6 0E 4 BIg QUT6 L1 7 IQ 16 1 OUT7 Jumper Bar Cut to Length L1 8 LE 18 17 4 OUT 8 L1 9 G 20 1914 OUT 9 Li 10 60 22 26 OUT 10 mii alia alg OUT 11 id Nonisolated j Wiring L1 12 CD 6 39 O0Uri2 L1 13 28 278 OUT 13 L1 14 G 30 29 OUT 14 e L1 15 D32 31K OUT 15 e HO ms JQ 34 33D Not Used Not Used El 36 ss CD Not Used o Pa EA l 2 ui X A Additional jumper bars may be purchased Daisy Chain to Other RTBs by using catalog number 1756 JMPR Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 157 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0B8 ControlLogix DC 10 30V output module
6. Bit 31 Bit 0 1 1 1 1 A communications fault sets all bits in the module fault word A fuse blown A A A A field power loss no load or output verify condition sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word 1 A blown fuse for any point sets the bit for that point in the fuse blown word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word Group 1 Group 0 1 A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the field power loss word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word LLLELELLELLEEEEE ELLE EE LL L EL LL ILI A no load condition for any point sets the bit for that point in the no load word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word An output verify condition for any point sets the bit for that point in the output verify word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 41457 Chapter 5 Fast Module Features Topic Page Fast Input Module Compatibility 83 Fast Output Module Compatibility 84 Fast Features 84 Features Specific to Fast Input Modules 85 Features Specific to Fast Output Modules 95 Fault and Status
7. 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 IB16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1756 IB16IF pcne m a x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24A 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 Fusible Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC with four terminals per input 1756 1B32 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM40D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators for inputs 1756 1C16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1756 1616 N A 1756 IH16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Fusible Isolated with 120V AC DC with four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS120A 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators with four terminals per input 1756 IM161 1492 IFM40DS240A 4 Status indicating Isolated with 240V AC status indicators an
8. Scope Fue Fue emp Shaw srona m Sop Too None E MESSAGE H Slot4 B fuse reset MESSAGE reset_slt4_b1 DINT Binary reset_slt4_b0 DINT Decimal Pulse_test_slot4_b0 MESSAGE pulse_slt4_bO DINT 5 Binary FE pulse results slt4 DINT 1 Decimal cH Pluse Results Slot4 DINT 1 Binary FE Local 8 1 AB 1756 DI DC A Local 3 C 4B 1756_DI_DC_ H Local 8l AB 1755 DI Time H Local8 C AB 1756 DI C O EFH Local 7 0 B 1756 DO D 0 gt Monitor Tags 4 EW Perform a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status This ladder logic example shows how to retrieve module identification and status through a WHO service In this application a message instruction retrieves the following module identification information e Product type e Product code e Major revision e Minor revision e Status e Vendor e Serial number e String length e ASCII string A full explanation of each module identification category is provided after the ladder logic application IMPORTANT The ladder logic example in this section uses a user defined WHO data structure and a series of Copy instructions following the Message instruction in the screen capture to make the module identification information more easily understood Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfigura
9. 1756 IB16IF Isolated Wiring GND 0 Ql D N 0 1 DC 1 o GND 1 e 3 N1 o 0 o0 DC 1 4 DC2 o GND 2 6 5 D N2 o o o DC2 GND 3 S 8 70 N 3 GND 4 gD 10 9 CD N 4 Module Source Input Wiring C50 90 o O GND Ee 11 ep INS o DC 5 DC 6 o o O 6ND 6 14 1 e IN 6 o DC6 GND 7 16 15 E IN 7 Jumper Bar Cut to Length cub i sis za Module Sink Input Wiring GND 9 D 2o 19 D N 9 Nonisolated Wiring GND0 ED 22 21 EDT N10 o o GND 1 a 23 EDI n o 0 9 GND 12 D s 21 N 12 o o Additional jumper bars may be purchased GND 13 QDs zo N 13 ENS e by using catalog number 1756 JMPR GND 4 E 0 29 EDL N14 o o GND 15 alz si D N 15 o 0 e DC o GND 15 D s4 33 Not Used L o DC 4 Not Used LIED 36 35 DH Not Used Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Simplified Schematic Current Limiter i Nx o PT Opto isolator Display X E Ee E v b ControlLogix Backplane Interface GND x gt Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 145 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 1B32 ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V input module
10. A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the field power loss word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 41457 Chapter 4 Diagnostic Module Features Topic Page Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility 67 Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility 68 Diagnostic Features 68 Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules 71 Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules 75 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers 79 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 81 Diagnostic modules provide additional reporting information to the controller such as a timestamp ofthe time a module fault occurs or clears no load detection and pulse tests The table lists the available diagnostic digital I O modules Cat No Description 1756 IA8D 79 132V AC8 point diagnostic input module 1756 IB16D 10 30V DC diagnostic input module 1756 0A8D 74 132V AC8 point diagnostic output module 1756 0B16D 19 2 30V DC 16 point diagnostic output module Diagnostic Input When designing systems with ControlLogix diagnostic input modules consider eg ege h f Module Compatibility aria e Voltage necessary for your application e Current leakage e Whether you need a solid state device e Whether your application should
11. Simplified Schematic DCo 4 Daisy Chain to 1756 0B8 Other RTBs 5V 2 rz S A d OUT 0 Gay GS GS ouro t Se O 2 3 A SENE Ss il B o 5 i J DC 0 E a5 0UT2 ControlLogix Backplane Interface RTN S OUT 0 DC 0 D QUT 3 Display LEZ LT RTN OUT 0 E5 eb RTN our o Surge Current Chart m DC 1 a gt d Surge ouri DC 1 A5 ours Group 1 Group 1 N Continuous 60 C 140 F DC 1 E E ours 5 x EES HGS ours RTN QUT 1 a5 RTN OUT 1 0 l 10ms 7 Time Daisy Chain Other RTBs 158 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1756 0B8EI Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 ControlLogix DC 10 30V electronically fused isolated output module Simplified Schematic j DCO 4 1 L cD OUT 0 Ey s Wiss T n EL A CS m OUT 0 isp f SER Output RTN ControlLogix Backplane Interface Device OUT 0 Surge Current Chart Surge an PE Continuous 60 C 140 F 2 2A 3 0 10 ms Time 1756 OB8EI t DC 0 J outo i 1 4 REN Isolated RTNOUEO 9 T vind Wiring Le g DC 1
12. 1756 IV16 Simplified Schematic E s NA ED no DC 0 R i i gt t Group 0 i 7 HG i Group 0 Na T Y K NS dB IEI san wo 0v t i GND i u N 7 ED 4 IN 6 oa Display DC 0 CD D DC 0 m Interface N 9 Ie KD IN 8 N 11 I ie IN 10 l N 13 i CO IN 12 roup 1 N 15 QD i CD Ee CY Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 151 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 1V32 ControlLogix DC 10 30V sourcing input module Simplified Schematic 1756 V32 45V r IN 1 2v N 0 DC 0 iS iy I N 3 la 3 N2 o t r N 5 lie 5j N 4 a ME ANN fi s Group 0 N 7 76 N 6 Group 0 IN 0 KK 1 it N 9 Jo 9 N 8 co E ia UND nn Te n N 10 Daisy N 43 T8 14 18 g N 12 i j Chain to omm opiy Gee w He eT m RTBs DC 0 7 Interface H epe y DC 0 4 IN 17 D 20 19 N 16 4 N19 T 22 21 N 18 TaT Jumper N 21 gzu zg N 20 Wire N23 HE zs ep IN22 N 25 28 zg N 24 Group 1 N27 G 30 29f N 26 Group 1 N 29 a 32 31 N 28 N 31 34 33 N 30 DC 1 CD 36 a5 CD DC 1 CON DC COM 152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P No
13. 0 Copy File Source Local 2 1 Pt 0 Timestamp OffOn 0 Dest InputTimestamp Length 1 Local 2 1 Pt 0 Data OP 1 Copy File Source Local 2 I Pt 0 Timestamp OnOff 0 Dest InputTimestamp Length 1 OP 2 Copy File Source InputTimestamp Dest LastlnputTimestamp Lenath 1 Clear Dest Local4 O TimestampOffset 0 Clear Dest Local 4 0 TimestampOffset 1 e Rung 3 is the main rung that checks for a change of state on the input point by comparing the current input timestamp with the last timestamp LastInputTimestamp Not Equal 64 bit Add 64 bit _NEQ _ADD 3 Not Equal 64 bit Add 64 bit L_NEQ InputChange L_ADD AddDelay Inp_A InputTimestamp Inp_ amp InputTimestamp Inp B LastinputTimestamp Inp B Delay Out OutputTimestamp Copy File Source OutputTimestamp Dest Local 4 0 Timestamp 0 Length Copy File Source InputTimestamp Dest LastinputTimestamp Length 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 225 AppendixC Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration The input point point 0 must have Change of State enabled Otherwise the timestamp will not update when the point transitions Once Change of State has been detected the value in the Delay tag is added to the input timestamp and sent to the output module s timestamp using a COP instruction This causes the output module to apply its output at a ti
14. ControlLogix Backplane Interface Display Surge Current Chart Surge 4A Continuous 30 C 86 F 2A Current Continuous 60 C 140 F 0 10 ms Time 166 Isolated Wiring DC 0 o DC 2 o Sinking Output Wiring DC 6 Hos IL Jumper Bar Cut to Length Nonisolated Wiring DCi oO d X S 7 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs DC 0 DC 1 DC 2 DC 3 DC 4 DC 5 DC 6 DC 7 DC 8 DC 9 DC 10 DC 11 DC 12 DC 13 DC 14 DC 15 DC 15 ot Used SEPT XErErzziz x F Lie Dy cn cn c d mm L3 HD cn en en spes bebe be e be b e bs bs s b ee e Isolated Sourcing Output Wiring UT 0 o DC 0 UT 1 UT2 UT 3 UT 4 UT 5 UT 6 UT 7 UT 8 UT 9 UT 10 UT 11 UT 12 UT 13 UT 14 UT 15 Not Used Not Used o DC 2 o DC 6 Nonisolated Sourcing Output Wiring oooooocoo0oco coc 0c 0000 e DC Additional jumper bars may be purchased by using catalog number 1756 JMPR Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1756 0B32 ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V output module Simplified Schematic DC 0 4 5V i
15. 45V Isolated DC 0 O GND 0 IN 0 Wiring pci jo GND 1 Cow GND 2 GND 0 K GND 3 C Source Input Wiring GND 4 y i GND i DC5 o O O 6ND5 DC6 o 5 o GNDE ON GND 7 ad Display Jumper Bar Cut to Length GND 8 ackplane cuba Interface D GND 11 Nonisolated GND 12 Wiring GND 13 Additional jumper bars may be purchased GND 14 by using catalog number 1756 JMPR GND 15 DC o GND 15 P dd Not Used N n Daisy Chain to Other RTI 1756 1B161 3G Oy Dy d E nenenanenemeens mn I n rm cy c trn rr f DA O a Zu Bs 144 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 NO O 0 9 DC 0 4 N1 o o o DC N 2 N 3 N 4 N 5 o DC 5 N 6 o DC 6 N 7 N 8 N 9 i N 10 O O0 N 11 0 0 uim Ed N13 O 0 N 14 O 9 9 N 15 O oO Not Used o DC Not Used 1756 IB16lF Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 ControlLogix DC 10 30V sinking or sourcing isolated fast input module
16. 1756 1H161 n DC 0 o GND 0 2 11 Isolated GND 1 4 3 DT Wiring GND 2 ale 5 DC 3 o GND 3 Ds 71 GND 4 q i109 ce GND 5 Eln n g GND 6 u 13 ED DC 7 O GND 7 amp p 16 15 CD Jumper Bar GND 8 CD18 17 Cut to Length GND 9 D 20 19 N GND 10 p22 21 DT Nonisolated GND 11 ED 24 23 EDT Wiring GND 12 C26 25 GND 13 D 28 27 GND 14 30 29 GND 15 DC p a2 31 O GND 15 34 33 9 Not Used CD 36 35 D T EI a Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams N 1 N 2 NA N 5 N 6 N 8 N 9 N 10 N 11 N 12 N 13 N 14 N 15 oTo glo Not Used Not Ysed Chapter 8 NO o o o DCO0 4 N 3 o lt oo 00314 N 7 oTo o DC 7 DC 149 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 IM161 ControlLogix AC 159 265V input module Simplified Schematic 1756 IM161 Isolated Wiring a 5V 20 o 1220 82 1 INO us ME C 2 E 1 t zr Pi o D2 Es i 12 0 F M AEK 12 3 Ae 7 C AA lil q T L2 4 o 124 epe 98 GND i 12 5 epa mg L2 6 M or 23 16 15 ControlLogix Display Jumper Bar s d ep Backplane Cut to Length L2 8 IG 18 17 Interface L2 9 z
17. Simplified Schematic 1756 IB32 d Current Limit 5y M NA Sg 0 IN 0 urrent Limiter j l a7 s 1 5 iie s 4 GND 0 3 3 VE Group 0 7 pls 7 6D 6 Group 0 C f 9 gho 9 p 8 GND Daisy Chain i Ea n 46 to Other RTBs 13 gu sE 12 ControlLogix Display 15 LIED ie 15 ED 14 Backplane EB D 0 ys v G Do Interface 17 20 19 16 18 n 18 o ad 21 glia 23 CD 20 C 23 16D 26 25 22 Soni 25 Qz 27 24 i 27 30 29 26 29 32 31 28 31 QI 34 33 D 30 GND 1 G 36 35 CD GND 1 l DC COM 146 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 1C16 ControlLogix DC 30 60V input module 1756 IC16 Simplified Schematic 45V IN 0 j C 2 t GND 0 va Coa re m t Controllogix Display Backplane Interface o amp B ETE EB E ED EB EB D amp B ED EB E ED G3 EB D Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 147 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 1G16 ControlLogix TTL input module
18. a 40201 M 4 Turn the terminal screw clockwise until the wire is secured The open section at the bottom of the RTB is called the strain relief area The wiring from the connections can be grouped with a plastic tie Spring Clamp Follow these steps to wire a spring clamp 1 Strip 11 mm 7 16 in maximum length of wire 2 Insert the screwdriver into the outer hole of the RTB to depress the spring loaded clamp 3 Insert the wire into the open terminal and remove the screwdriver Strain Relief Area 20860 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 117 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules IMPORTANT Make sure the wire and not the screwdriver is inserted into the open terminal to prevent damage to the module The open section at the bottom of the RTB is called the strain relief area The wiring from the connections can be grouped with a plastic tie RTB Wiring Recommendations Consider these guidelines when wiring your RTB e Begin wiring the RTB at the bottom terminals and move up e Usea tie to secure the wires in the strain relief area of the RTB e A jumper bar is shipped with certain I O modules to assist in installation For an example of when to use the jumper bar see the 1756 IA16I wiring diagram Extra jumper bars can be purchased by ordering catalog number 1756 JMPR e For applications that require heavy gauge wiring order and
19. Es 7 Input Module Configuration Data Yoox XXXXX Yoox coos gt wo 41056 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners Initial Configuration Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 As soon as a controller receives its user program it will try to establish a connection with the input module A connection is established with the controller whose configuration data arrives first When the second controller s configuration data arrives the module compares it to its current configuration data which was received and accepted from the first controller If the configuration data sent by the second controller matches the data sent by the first controller that connection is also accepted If any parameter of the second configuration data is different from the first the module rejects the connection and the user is informed by an error in the software or via program logic The advantage of multiple owners over a Listen only connection is that either of the controllers can break the connection to the module and the module will continue to operate and multicast data to the system through the connection maintained by the other controller You must be careful when changing an input mo
20. good joe eeeseeee C3 c m ber 2012 OO O O Oo O 0 Oo O D 2 UO T O Not U d d X rh amp mnnu 5c ce oF UUN Not U z z a oOooooooooo sed oooooso A A Vy V A f V 0120 O L2 2 O DC 4 L2 1756 0X81l ControlLogix AC 10 240V DC 5 125V isolated contact module 1756 0X8l Simplified Schematic solate irin 42A us Lt L 0 2 1 4 L1 0 G 4 3C Eo pie L1 0 L1 1 Qie sq ControlLogix C 23 Lit Tes 79 Backplane i O DC 2 O L1 2 TE vo 9 Interface 4 ool OUT 0 N C U2 T nig E pu gt u 3 T 14 38D a nm C Jumper Bar Cut to Length L1 3 16 1519 E OUT 0 N O Part number 97739201 L1 4 E 18 178 Display LA E 20 1912 L1 5 g 22 ng L1 5 HE 24 zg Nonisolated L1 6 E 26 25 D Wiring L1 6 g 28 zE Additional jumper bars may be purchased L1 7 Eq 30 29 by using catalog number 1756 JMPR L1 7 gas L1 o L1 7 o 34 33 4 ia Not Used FT 36 359 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams OUT 0 N C OUT 0 N O OUT 1 N C OUT 1
21. Topic Page Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State 51 Set RPI 51 Enable Change of State 52 Software Configurable Filter Times 53 Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Input Modules 53 Multiple Input Point Densities 54 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State Digital input modules always send data at the RPI but they send data at a change of state only ifthe COS feature is enabled COS is more efficient than RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs The table describes the two ways a module sends data to the owner controller Method Description RPI A user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer cos Configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off and Off to On The data will be sent at the RPI rate when there is no change of state By default this setting is always enabled for input modules Set RPI The Connection tab on the Module Properties dialog box lets you enter an RPI The RPI guarantees the slowest rate at which data is multicast The module s actual data transfer rate may be faster than the RPI setting But the RPI provides a defined maximum period of tim
22. Connection Data Output Data Data 205 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 51 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Data Output continued Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Pt x PWMFaultValueStateDuration SINT Fault State Duration Defines the length of time that the output state remains inthe Connection Data Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off The Fault mode state is Output Data Data defined in the FaultValue tag Valid values e 0 Hold forever default Output remains in Fault mode for as long as the fault condition persists e 1 2 5 0r 10 seconds Pt x PWMCycleLimit SINT PWM Cycle Limit Defines the number of pulse cycles to occur when the output turns Connection Data On Output Data Data e Ifthe corresponding bit in the PWM ExecuteAllCycles tag is set the configured number of cycles will occur even if the output turns Off e Ifthe corresponding bit in the PWM ExecuteAllCydes tag is cleared the configured number of cycles will occur only if the output remains On For example if the cycle limit is 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles the 4th cycle will not occur The default cycle limit is 10 Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag and cycle limits to be enabled via the PWM CycleLimitEnable tag Pt x PWMMinimumOnTime REAL PWM Minimum On Time Defines the minimum length of time required for the output Connection Data
23. 5 g P OUT 1 j 1d 7 E 4 RTN OUT 1 amp DP OUT 1 DC 2 10 9 D OUT 2 f E e mow Ee nf our2 EE vos U9 Big OUT RTN OUT 3 e 16 15 G OUT 3 DC 4 epu 17 G OUT 4 V M Wem RINOUT4 D2o 19 8 our A d amp DC5 4 iz 21 g OUT 5 e 9 RTN OUT 5 D2 zg OUT 5 e __ 0C6 p 26 25 d OUT 6 Daisy Chain to y Other RTBs 9T RTN OUT 6 giz 2 CD OUT 6 A amp j 4 DC 7 amp pso 29 OU e o RTN OUT 7 32 31 8 OUT 7 C i acm a gla ss a Daisy Chain to Not Used S g Not Used Other RTBs Not Used Cp ae ss CD Not Used I DC COM Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 159 Chapter 8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0B8l ControlLogix DC 10 30V isolated output module 45V Simplified Schematic 160 PE Z MES t 4 isp ispay Output ControlLogix Backplane Interface Device Surge Current Chart Surge 4A 3 2A 3 0 10 ms Time DC 0 OUT 0 2 OUT 0 RTN OUT 0 Continuous 60 C 140 F Isolated Wiring Nonisolated Wiring 1756 OBI Daisy Chainto Other c RIBs Daisy Chainto Other RTBs e Q Q i Q 202p Z ZL2 s OFeoreres aT 5 aT mu wo N gt ce Q c uz terze X Ti c gt NO C 7 RTN OUT 7 Not Used Not Used T
24. 560810 1756 0832 1756 0V32E 1756 0C8 1756 OH8I N DCOUTPUT 4 DC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT 3 01234567 3 ST01234567 3 3 HT 01234567 0 301234567 0 S 89101112314 15 C K FIT 89 1011 12 1314 15 311112222 6 3567890123 6 6 3122222233 SCHEDULED 314567 8901 1756 0B8EI 1756 0W16l 1756 0X8l RN N DCOUTPUT amp RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT 3 8 S 01234567 0 5801234567 0 5101234567 0 FSRA TA aHa K ST 8 910 111213 1415 K H K 6 ELECTRONICALLY FUSED Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 179 AppendixA Troubleshoot Your Module Use RSLogix 5000 Software In addition to the status indicator display on the module RSLogix 5000 software for Troubleshooting will alert you to fault conditions Fault conditions are reported in these ways e Warning signal on the main screen next to the module This occurs when the connection to the module is broken e Message in a screens status line e Notification in the Tag Editor General module faults are also reported in the Tag Editor Diagnostic faults are reported only in the Tag Editor e Status on the Module Info tab The following windows display fault notification in RSLogix 5000 software As shown in Figure 23 a warning icon E appears in the I O Configuration tree when a communication fault occurs Figure 23 Warning Signal on Main Screen 9 1756 Backplane 1756 4 fl 5 1756 H5C hsc m
25. to channel isolation and no isolation Your application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which input module to use Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 53 Chapter3 Common Module Features Common Features Specific to Output Modules 54 Multiple Input Point Densities ControlLogix input modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application A point is the termination where a wire attaches to the input module from a field device The module receives information from the device to this designated point thus signaling when activity occurs The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix digital output modules IMPORTANT Some features are not available on all output modules The table indicates which modules support each feature Topic Page Available Modules Configurable Point level Output States 55 All modules Output Data Echo 56 All modules Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Output Modules 56 All modules Multiple Output Point Densities 57 All modules Electronic Fusing 57 1756 0A8D 1756 0A8E 1756 0B16D 1756 0B16E 1756 OB8EI 1756 OB16lEF 1756 OB16lEFS 1756 0V16E 1756 0V32E Field Power Loss Detection 60 1756 0A8E Diagnostic Latch of Information 61 1756 0A8E 1756 0B16lEF 1756 OB16lEFS Time scheduled Output Control 63 1756 0B161S 1756 OB16IEFS Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN
26. Data transmissions that reach a specific group of one or more destinations A configuration set up where multiple owner controllers use exactly the same configuration information to simultaneously own an input module The smallest repetitive time interval in which the data can be sent on a ControlNet network The NUT ranges from 2 ms to 100 ms The controller that creates and stores the primary configuration and communication connection to a module In this mode the following events occur e Controller program is not executing e Inputs are still actively producing data e Outputs are not actively controlled and go to their configured Program mode An I O connection where the 1756 CNB module collects digital I O words into a rack image to conserve ControlNet connections and bandwidth A communication format in which the 1756 CNB module collects all digital I O words in the remote chassis and sends them to controller as a single rack image An I O connection where the controller establishes an individual connection with I O modules in a remote chassis ControlLogix feature that allows a user to install or remove a module or RTB while power is applied Field wiring connector for I O modules The maximum amount of time between broadcasts of I O data In this mode the following events occur e Controller program is executing e Inputs are actively producing data e Outputs are actively controlled A system feature that is
27. EMIL HMM cal 1 l Pt 0 CIPSyncV alid ocal 1 l Pt 0 CIPSyncTimeout H Local 1 1 Pt0 Timestamp eee flocaliP OTmesampOOn hd fElocaliP OTmesampOnO tad l Locak1 1 Pt 1 TES Locat 1 1 Pt 2 foal ojojojojojojoj o w 1 Other digital I O modules use a flat data structure In this type of structure only one instance ofa tag exists for a module For example in Figure 27 only one instance of each tag appears under the input module in slot 3 To reference or copy data for an individual point you specify the tag name followed by a bit number such as Data 0 or EventOverflow 3 Unlike an array structure where all the data for a point can be accessed via a single tag reference a flat structure requires multiple tag references to access all the data for a point Figure 27 Flat Data Structure E Local 3 1 A H Locat 3 l Fault 281111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 FE Locat31 Data 280000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 FE Local 31 NewData 280000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Local 3 1 Event0 verflow 280000 0000 0000 0000 O000 0000 0000 0000 ocal 3 1 RetumingUCT Time cal 3 l RetumingCIPSyncTime cal 3 l CIPSyncValid FE Locak3 I EventNumber FH Local3 l LocalClockOffset FE Local3 Difsettimestamp Locak3 Timestamp 0 0 o 0 0 The 1756 OB16IEFS module
28. Extended depth Housing Wire Capacity Standard depth 336 mm 0 52 in2 30484 M The housings shown are used with a spring clamp RTB but the capacity for Number of Wires 36 18 AWG wires 23 14 AWG wires IMPORTANT each remains the same regardless of RTB type Cat No RTB Type 1756 TBNH NEMA damp 1756 TBSH Spring clamp 20 position 1756 TBCH Cage clamp 1756 TBS6H Spring clamp 36 position 1756 TBE Any RTB that uses heavy gauge wiring Extended depth 628 mm 0 97 in 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 40 14 AWG wires Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 Cabinet Size Considerations with Extended depth Housing When you use extended depth housing catalog number 1756 TBE the I O module depth is increased The diagram shows the difference in depth between an I O module using standard depth housing and one using extended depth housing Dimensions are in mm in a 144 73 5 698 gt 12 7 0 5 13175 5 187 gt b 3 18 0 125 pem Y E Rear Surface of ControlLogix Chassis Standard depth Housing N S Y Extended depth Housing J ole Z 41682 IMPOR
29. Pulse Width Modulation Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Pulse Width Modulation PWM provides precise onboard control of an output s pulse train with no program variability To configure a PWM signal you define two real time values for the pulse train in the module s output tags e Cycle time The duration ofa pulse cycle in seconds from 1 ms 1 hour e Ontime The pulse width or length of time that a pulse is active within a cycle from 200 ys 1 hour You can define the On time in seconds or as 0 100 percent of the cycle time You may want to use a steady state On time such as for gluing applications or a dynamic On time that is defined by program logic If the cycle time or On time is outside the valid range for an output the corresponding bit in the Fault input tag is set and the module responds as described below Condition PWMCycleTime lt minimum of 1ms Result PWMCycleTime 1 ms PWMCycleTime gt maximum of 1 hour PWMCycleTime 1 hour PWMCycleTime lt PWMOnTime Output is always On PWMOnTime lt minimum of 200 ps Output is always Off PWMOnTime gt maximum of 1 hour PWMOnTime 1 hour If the cycle time or On time value changes while the output is generating a PWM signal the changes are not applied until the next cycle of the PWM output For instance if the cycle time is erroneously set to an hour a new cycle time will not go into effect until the last cycle of t
30. WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation ATTENTION Although the module is designed to support RIUP when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature ATTENTION Prevent Electrostatic Discharge This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static e Wear an approved grounding wriststrap e Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards e Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment e Usea static safe workstation if available e Store the equipment in appropriate static safe packaging when not in use Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 111 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Follow these steps to insert the module into the chassis 1 Align the circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guid
31. e at the left side of the rung 4 H res ies nn GSu ssu zoT gt 4 Alarms Bit eri Counter Input Output A Compare 18 saele EE M lessage 3 Find then click MSG message instruction on the instruction toolbar The MSG icon is among the formats on the Input Output tab of the instruction toolbar You also can drag and drop an instruction icon onto a rung A green dot appears when a valid location is detected for the instruction on the rung Inside the message box in the Message Control field right click the question mark to access a pull down menu SG Message Messane Control d Cut Instruction Ctrl x Copy Instruction Ctrl C Um Paste Ctrl Delete Instruction Del Add 1 adda Flamank Alkire Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 215 AppendixC Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration 5 Choose New Tag The New Tag dialog box appears with the cursor in the Name field IMPORTANT We suggest you name the tag to indicate what module service the message instruction is sending For example if a message instruction is to reset an electronic fuse then name the tag reset fuse to reflect this LI xi Name Slot4_ChO_Reset_ Fuse Description p Cancel Help Usage normal M Type Base b2 Connection Alias For Data Type MESSAGE ES Scope fs L63 New Controller Ext
32. e e d D e e iE e oe H qd D 2 4 0 e p a bw Q D e e ley bell e o a B e Di e o CQ LJ e o Uo I f 40200 M Item Description 1 Backplane Connector Interface for the ControlLogix system that connects the module to the backplane 2 Top and bottom guides Guides provide assistance in seating the RTB or IFM onto the module 3 Status indicators Indicators display the status of communication module health and input output devices Indicators help in troubleshooting anomalies 4 Connector pins Input output power and grounding connections are made to the module through these pins with the use of an RTB or IFM 5 Locking tab the locking tab anchors the RTB or IFM on the module maintaining wiring connections 6 Slots for keying Mechanically keys the RTB to prevent making the wrong wire connections to your module Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Module Identification and Status Information What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 1 Each ControlLogix I O module maintains specific identification information that separates it from all other modules This information assists you in tracking all the components of your system For example you can track module identification information to know which modules are located in any ControlLogix chassis at any time While retrieving module identity you can also retrieve module status Item De
33. j OUT 1 V A RTN OUT 0 is go D nde I i ooa HC F our D KD ControlLogix Backplane Interface DC 0 ie ie OUT 3 10 9 Display RTN OUT O iG id RTN OUTO 2 A DC 1 ie ie OUT 4 Surge Current Chart LAWN oeat ED B ours Group 1 qa puse DC 1 i i OUT 6 rd DC 1 ZL Ip B 4 IEB i 0UT7 5 ontinuous 60 C 140 ET S 2a l eee HAD TH E RTN OUT 1 dB d RTN OUT 1 CN Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 0 10ms Time DC COM 168 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0616 ControlLogix TTL output module Standard Wiring CE Compliant Wiring 1756 0G16 1756 0G16 EE 71 DC Power Wire x n i 5V DC 7 Al 0O our ES EB ovo O Power Bin ie I oua Hu q P svoe O e ITED KD o2 D s our3 GB ED our2 g q 6 5 L ours ID a OUT 4 L sine KD ie aes eL r EIIE ours L BS e C5 lours Wm HI F 1 0 Wire i Hi T j DC e Deo LED LED p
34. 13 x5 1V x24V x33V 14 x5 1V x24V x33V 15 x5 1V x24V x33V 16 x5 1V x24V x33V Totals mA W 1 mA W 2 mA W 3 This number This number This number cannot exceed the cannot exceed cannot exceed following 2800 mA 4000 mA 10000 mA for 1756 PA72 1756 PB72 13000 mA for 1756 PA75 1756PB75 1756 PC75 1756 PH75 These three wattage values 1 2 3 added together cannot exceed 75 W 60 C 140 F for any power supply Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 233 AppendixD Choose a Correct Power Supply Notes 234 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Appendix E Motor Starters for Digital 1 0 Modules This appendix provides data to help you choose a ControlLogix digital I O module to drive Bulletin 500 series motor starters in your application The tables list the number of motor starters five sizes are listed for each module that a particular digital I O module can drive IMPORTANT When using the tables remember that the supply voltage for each module must not drop below the minimum state motor starter supply voltage Table 61 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 120V AC 60 Hz Cat No Motor Starters Size 0 1 Size 2 Size3 Size4 Size 5 1756 0A161 16 15 30 C 86 F 13 30 C 86 F 8 30 C 86 F 5 30 C 86 F 12 60 C 140
35. 17564418 16 Port 79 132N AC Isolated Input 17554432 R Port 74 13XN AL Ingut TEUD B Part 79 1 XV AC Ohagreste ingad 17564818 16 Por 10 31 2V OC Irgat 175640160 16 Port 10 30 DC Diagnostic Iroa IAMA IR Pound WAM DC fended Irene unis eun ij 38 el 106 Madde Types Fours IO Gone on Crewe Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 129 Chapter7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 3 On the Select Major Revision dialog box click OK to accept the default major revision Select Major Revision Select major revision for new 1755 1B15D module being created Major Revision On the New Module dialog box complete the fields and click OK e For information about choosing an electronic keying method see page 40 e For information about choosing a communication format or connection type see page 134 The fields on the New Module dialog box vary depending on the catalog number of your 1 0 module New Module Type 17564B16D 16 Point 10 30 DC Diagnostic Input Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Name Slot 0 Description Comm Format Full Diagnostics Input Data Revision 31 E Electronic Keying Compatible Keying v To edit the module s configuration make sure the Open Module Properties checkbox is checked Openi Modu Properties peee Germal Connection Module Info Configuration 17561B16F 15 Point
36. Data Data with Event following Listen Only or Listen Only with Event e The corresponding bit was set in the LatchTimestamps configuration tag so a new Input Data Timestamp Data timestamp was not recorded because the previous timestamp was latched The corresponding bit in the LatchTimestamps configuration tag was not set but a timestamp was replaced by a new timestamp because the previous timestamp was not acknowledged via the Pt x NewDataOffOnAck or Pt x NewDataOnOffAck output tags 0 A timestamp was not dropped 1 A timestamp was dropped Pt x CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid tndicates whether CIP Sync is available on the backplane Connection Data Data with Event 0 CIP Sync is not available Listen Only or Listen Only with Event 1 CIP Sync is available Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout Indicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has timed Connection Data Data with Event out Listen Only or Listen Only with Event 0 A time master is either not detected on the backplane or is valid See Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x CIPSyncValid 1 A valid time master was detected on the backplane but the time master has timed out Pt x InputOverrideStatus BOOL Input Override Status lndicates whether local inputs are being overridden by the Connection Data Data with Event value in the Pt x DataOverrideValue output tag because the corresponding bit in the Listen
37. to turn On Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag Valid values 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or 0 100 percent Table 52 1756 0B16IEFS Module Input Data Tags Scheduled per Point Output Output Data Data Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Fault DINT Fault Status Indicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the output Connection Data module is lost then all 32 bits of the Module Fault word are set Output Data Scheduled per 0 No fault Point 1 Fault or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Data BOOL Data Indicates the current value to be sent to the corresponding output point If PWMis Connection Data enabled this value will transition from 0 to 1 based on the PWM pulse train Output Data Scheduled per 0 0ff Point 1 0n or Connection Listen Only Output Data None FuseBlown BOOL Fuse Is Blown lIndicates whether a fuse has blown due to a short or overload condition Connection Data for the corresponding point All blown fuse conditions are latched and must be reset Output Data Scheduled per 0 Fuse is not blown Point 1 Fuse is blown and has not been reset or Connection Listen Only Output Data None CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid lndicates whether the module has synchronized to a valid CIP Sync Connection Data 206 time master on the backplane 0 CIP Sync is not available 1 CIP Sync is available Rockwell Au
38. 10 30V electronically fused sinking output module Simplified Schematic 1756 OVI6E Display Optoisolation gt T 1 aa OUT 1 I E OUT 0 e o 4 Y o oc e ree g g zs E m OUT3 D ie OUT 2 A Miss OUT 5 i i OUT 4 Group 0 MY ow Er E x RIN OUT 7 OUT 6 sean OUT 0 o s ectronic Fuse J RTN OUT 0 Weng cy KO mem Interface D i OUT 8 13 OUT 10 5 Surge Current Chart i i OUT 12 Pli i OUT 14 2A Surge ID ID Continuous 60 C 140 C iS E KINOGA g 1A m 3 1 CN 0 10 ms Time Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Daisy Chain to Other RTB 172 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0V32E ControlLogix DC 10 30V electronically fused sinking output module Simplified Schemati TRISTIS TEAMS Daisy Chain to 1756 0V32E Daisy Chain to Display Optoisolation DCO 4 Other RTBs Other RTBs para oui amp D OUTO em OUT 3 gt 358 OUT 2
39. 1756 OBIGIEFS eso phcat er x nh RR E RPPE EK REIDAY PE AREEES 165 1756 OBIGIS issetesoktebtatke br e E EpRRE P ELE E PE RIA 166 I 35D isanime ne idis bbu E EaR 167 1756 OC cs 168 1756 OGG 9 169 ECONS T a ohne es onne eee eoeueaes 170 1756 ONB8 bois veswxs Paese ER sron eTEN e erate beegekes 171 IW 814 Nm 172 Wis ae 24 NRI DM TETTE NI I IE ere or 173 I736 CTW IGL erreti eeno aane ROPEAAURER TAPER E E RA EOD 174 ipe 4 0 erc ETT 175 Appendix A Status Indicators for Input Modules i422 de hro e ehnou 177 Status Indicators for Output Modules amp i idea e rrooer rob enone 178 Use RSLogix 5000 Software for Troubleshooting 180 Fault Type Determination ii iiis esebebtise esent bar bbra EY 181 Appendix B Standard and Diagnostic Input Module Tags sues 183 Standard and Diagnostic Output Module Tags ss 186 Past Input Module ABS 2 iaasewpeosid ade o skohe pep Ehe RT 189 Fast Output Madule Tage qud eckopuieus wd pone Fa bud es img daga a 194 1756 OB16IEF Mod le uascaaat s PUx dtd ea diua ai ada buie 194 1756 OB16IEFS Module aues cpadapeeantexdyayaneseepeteren 202 Array Data SOC EUER id oe xbo ba EEE Pod rb e dap ERU 211 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Choose a Correct Power Supply Motor Starters for Digital 1 0 Modules
40. 2 ms that is 20 Pulse Width INT Pulse Test Parameters 4 2 For AC modules only this specifies how long to delay after the zero cross before performing the pulse test Optimum time to perform pulse test is at its peak AC voltage Units are in 100 us increments Default tag value 4 ms that is 40 Zero Cross Delay INT Pulse Test Parameters 6 2 Specifies how long to wait after the pulse is completed before declaring a fault Output verify delay parameter is needed to account for the hardware propagation delay Units are in 100 us increments Default tag value 2 ms that is 20 Output Verify Delay INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Pulse Test Parameters 8 2 219 Appendix C Table 58 Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services Required for RSLogix 5000 Software Version 9 00 00 or Earlier continued Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Source Destination Tag Description Copy Instruction COP This instruction moves data to from in MSG Instruction generic source destination buffers Source Destination Length bytes CST_Information SINT 20 Current CST Time from Module CST_Information 0 Current Time DINT 2 8 Status of CST in Module CST Information 8 CST Status INT 2 Bit0 0 timer OK 1 timer fault Bit1 0 no ramping 1 ramping ramping indicates that once time
41. D L1 0 ia IEB QUT 2 pA 2 10 9 Display Loss of Field Power L1 0 Ig Ig OUT 3 2 11 i 14 OUT 4 Surge Current Chart pes to KD KD Other Surge 30 C 86 F es TU I p iis py ee m TB re oj o Group 1 18 17 n Surge 60 C 140 F H4 ie ie our7 5 Conti 30 C 86 F f HP 41 animas e Ci Bie 500 mA Continuous 60 C 140 F mA SUTEAN I C CN 0 43 ms Time Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 154 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1756 0A8E Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 ControlLogix AC 74 132V electronically fused output module Simplified Schematic ControlLogix Opto and Transformer Isolation u Backplane gt Interface ms Kk Short GATE GOE H OUT D Display Loss of Field Power Surge Current Chart 20A Surge 3 2A 0 m 43ms Time Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Group 0 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Group 1 Not Used 1756 0A8E w cB E ED EDI EDI FED EB e Ge e Ee E E EP F Cae S D L2 0 OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 L2 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs
42. Major Revision Upgrades 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules History of Changes Glossary Index Table of Contents Appendix C Using Message Instructions acseeer e ov ae ran I EVE Rea 213 Processing Real time Control and Module Services 214 One Service Performed Per Instruction 0 0 cesses 214 Ciera a New Tap ERSA 214 Enter Message Configuration cesa eas aoo ERO 24a dr ee EP 217 Configuration Lab T ii ECES ineei ENEE EEE 218 Communication Tabs ssa se eee or er cavevereted r i is Tapias 221 Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs for Standard and Diagnostic I O Modules s 222 Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs for Fast DO Modules ccsuxdenie corsicis cecake etin 224 Reset a Fuse Perform Pulse Test and Reset Latched Diagnostics 227 Perform a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status 228 Review of Tags in Ladder Logic 00 cece ee eect eee ees 231 Appendix D bbs ettet Beil ue ule a a aid Sauna des dU Ene 233 Appendix E Determine the Maximum Number of Motor Starters 236 Appendix F If Using a Compatible or Disabled Keying I O Configuration 238 If Using an Exact Match Keying Configuration 238 Appendix G Cable Overview iiss ccc ronie eoa ee e bs Eee rU RE 239 Appendix H 1756 UMOS58F EN P April 2012 Sots EE E cue 249 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 i issexsssqe bre be U E RUE ERE ER 250 Roc
43. PWM On Time 0 0000 PWH Cycle Time 0 0000 D PWH On Time and PWM Cycle Time are defined in the Output Tag for this module Minimum On Time 0 0000 Seconds C Extend Cyce to Accomodate Minimum On Time C Stepper Output to Adjust Cycle Phase to Minimize Smaltanecus Outputs On Tene in Second O Percent C Enable Cycle Umi Cycle Uri eode Al 3 In the Points area click a numbered button to configure the corresponding output point Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 103 Chapter 5 Field Enable Pulse Width Modulation PWM Fast Module Features 4 In the Pulse Width Modulation area complete the fields as described in the table below Description Check the checkbox to enable PWM If this checkbox is cleared all other PWM fields are unavailable and the PWM On time and cycle time for the point are ignored By default PWM is disabled 1756 0B16IEF Tag Name CPt x PWMEnable 1756 0B16IEFS Tag Name CPWM Enable PWM On Time view only Displays the length of time that a pulse is active as defined in the PWMOnTime output tag By default this value is defined in seconds with a range of 0 0002 3600 0 However you can define the value as 0 100 percent of the cycle time by dicking On Time in Percent below IMPORTANT Before PWM will function you must enable PWM during configuration and define the PWM cycle time and On time in the PWMCycleTime and PWMOnTime outpu
44. Surge 4A S 2A 3 TA d 164 Continuous 2 A 45 C 113 F 10 ms Continuous 1 A 60 C 140 F Isolated Wiring DC 0 DC0 o C D DC 2 0 OUT 0 Sinking Output Wiring a a Jumper Bar Cut to Length Nonisolated Wiring DCH o o DC 0 DC 1 DC 2 DC 3 DC 4 DC 5 DC 6 DC 7 DC 8 DC 9 DC 10 DC 11 DC 12 DC 13 DC 14 DC 15 DC 15 Not Used 1756 0B161EF T DDO im 0 tn cm to dn y D D KD Oy Oy C5 n C3 5 3 c my d ee Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Isolated Sourcing Output Wiring OUT 0 o DCO OUT 1 0UT2 o DC2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8 OUT 9 OUT 10 OUT 11 Nonisolated OUT 12 Sourcing OUT 13 Output OUT 14 Wiring OUT 15 ot Used ot Used DC O DC 6 Additional jumper bars may be purchased by using catalog number 1756 JMPR Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0B16lEFS ControlLogix DC 10 30V scheduled electronically protected sinking or sourcing isolated fast output module
45. TimestampOffset DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates the difference between the system time and the modules Connection Data local time The timestamp is in CIP Sync time Output Data Scheduled per This value is typically set to zero but can be updated with the value of the SystemOffset in Module the controller s TIMESYNCHRONIZE object to enable Time Step Compensation in the module Timestamp DINT Timestamp CIP Sync time at which to apply scheduled output data Connection Data 1756 OB161EFS Module Output Data Scheduled per Module The tag names and data structures for the 1756 OB16IEFS module vary based on the module definition e For Scheduled Per Point output the module uses a flat data structure See Table 50 Table 52 and Table 54 e For Data output or Listen Only connections the module uses an array data structure See Table 51 Table 53 and Table 55 For more information about array data structures see Array Data Structures on page 211 Table 50 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Scheduled per Point Output Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition ProgloFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Mode Enables the transition of outputs to Fault mode if a Connection Data communication failure occurs in Program mode Otherwise outputs will remain in Output Data Scheduled per Program mode See FaultMode FaultValue ProgMode and ProgValue Point 0 Outputs stay in Program mode
46. fa 8 1756 L63 myhsc 180 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Troubleshoot Your Module Appendix A As shown in Figure 24 major and minor faults are listed on the Module Info tab in the Status section Figure 24 Fault Message in Status Line E Module Properties Local 5 1756 HSC 1 1 General Connection Mode Info Counter Configuration Output Contigaation Backplane Identification Stetur Vendor Alen Bradey Mag Faul Nore Product Typa Specialty UU Mra Fault None Product Code 1756H5C Intel State Progam mode Revision 16 ene Canig Serial Number snanenac Configured Yes Product Name 1756 HSC Ver 16 Owned Yes Match Courdevated System Time CST Timer Hardee Ok Tenet Sync ed No As shown in Figure 25 the Value field displays 65535 to indicate the module connection has been broken Figure 25 Notification in Tag Editor Scope fa mhs v Show Show al Force Mask ABTISE B AB1TEG HSCI O Decimal DNT boo Decimal DINT local LS wo as Decinal ONTA Locat IW Decinal SINT lods Decima NT Decimal SINT Fault Type Determination When you are monitoring a module s configuration properties in RSLogix 5000 software and receive a Communication fault message the Connection tab lists the type of fault under Module Fault E Module Properties Local 8 1756 0B16D 3 1 General Connection Module
47. gt e eD IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Allen Bradley ControlLogix ControlLogix XT DH Data Highway Plus Integrated Architecture Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation RSLogix RSNetWorx and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Summary of Changes This manual contains new and updated information Changes throughout this revision are marked by change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph Topic Page Studio 5000 Logix Designer application is the rebranding of RSLogix 5000 software 11 Added the 1756 OB16IEFS module to the list of 1 0 modules 15 Added content to describe when output data is sent to the 1756 OB16IEFS module in motion 33 applications Added the 1756 OB16IEFS module to the CIP Sync time section 48 Added the 1756 OB16IEFS module to sections about electronic fusing diagnostic latching and 54 58 63 time scheduled output control Added the 1756 OB16IEFS module to the list of fast 1 0 modules 83 Added software version requirements for the 1756 OB16IEFS module 84 Added the 1756 OB16lEFS module to the table of connection formats 133 Added the wiring diagram for the 1756 0B16IEFS module 165 Added status indicators for the 1756 OB16IEFS module 179 Added tag definitions for the 1756 OB
48. use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures
49. 04 00 and later Then do this 1 Delete the 2 x module from the 1 0 Configuration in the RSLogix 5000 software project 2 Add a new 3 x revision module to the 1 0 configuration RSLogix 5000 software version 12 06 00 and earlier Do one of the following e Change the module s configuration to Disable Keying e Upgrade RSLogix 5000 software to version 13 04 00 or later and complete the steps listed for RSLogix software version 13 04 00 or later Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Cable Overview As an alternative to buying RTBs and connecting the wires yourself you can buy a wiring system that connects to I O modules through prewired and pretested cables IMPORTANT The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency The combinations include the following e Interface modules IFMs mount on DIN rails to provide the output terminal blocks for the I O module Use the IFMs with the prewired cables that match the I O module to the interface module 1 0 Module Prewired Cable IFM e Prewired cables are individually color coded conductors that connect to a standard terminal bloc
50. 155 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0A16 ControlLogix AC 74 265V output module Simplified Schematic 1756 0A16 1 0 ControlLogix z Backplane 0UT 1 IES i OUT 0 Interface is s n i KD KO L3 A Group 0 Ar IH Lev x o D OUT 3 49 CO 0UT 2 f Daisy Chain OUT 5 I IES OUT 4 Group 0 Fused per Group to Other 1 i Display I RTBs OUT 7 E E OUT 6 ee s 0 ls my E L1 0 i iG L2 0 iw as 1 1 MESES p OUT 9 D KD OUT 8 7 ControlLogix Backplane Interface i i OUT 11 i OUT 10 D Group 1 0UT 13 ie OUT 12 TC p Surge Current Chart 8 D ouis IEB IEB ours 20 9 Surge Per Group H n 20A L4 DIE un E x Per Group a Z 2A 500 mA 0 43ms Time 156 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1756 0A16I Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 ControlLogix AC 74 265V isolated output module Simplified Schematic 5V L1 0 i a s ae i OUT 0 ControlLogix Backplane Interface e Display Surge Current Chart 20A s a Continuous 30 C 86 F ia Continuous 60 C 140 F 0 43 ms Time
51. 1616 Transitor transitor logic TTL input module 148 1756 IH161 90 146V DC 16 point isolated input module 149 1756 IM16l 159 265V AC 16 point isolated input module 150 1756 IN16 10 30V AC 16 point input module 150 1756 IV16 10 30V DC 16 point sourcing current input module 151 1756 132 10 30V DC 32 point sourcing current input module 152 1756 0A8 74 265V AC8 point output module 153 1756 0A8D 74 132V AC8 point diagnostic output module 154 1756 0A8E 74 132V AC8 point electronically fused output module 155 1756 0A16 74 265V AC 16 point output module 156 1756 0A16l 74 265V AC 16 point isolated output module 157 1756 088 10 30V DC8 point output module 158 1756 OB8EI 10 30V DC 8 point electronically fused isolated output module 159 1756 0B8l 10 30V DC 8 point isolated output module 160 1756 0B16D 19 2 30V DC 16 point diagnostic output module 161 1 The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTB catalog numbers 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency 14 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 1 Table 1 ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules continued Cat No Description Page
52. 1756 1016 147 1756 1616 148 1756 IH161 149 1756 IM161 150 1756 IN16 150 1756 IV16 151 1756 132 152 1756 0416 156 1756 0A161 157 1756 048 153 1756 0A8D 154 1756 OA8E 155 1756 0B16D 161 1756 0B16E 162 1756 0B161 163 1756 0B16IEF 164 1756 0B16IEFS 165 1756 0B161S 166 1756 0832 167 1756 088 158 1756 OB8EI 159 1756 0B8l 160 1756 0C8 168 1756 0616 169 1756 0H8l 170 1756 0N8 171 1756 0V16E 172 1756 0V32E 173 1756 0W16l 174 1756 0X8l 175 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 module compatibility diagnostic input modules 67 output modules 68 fast input modules 83 output modules 84 standard input modules 37 output modules 38 module fault word diagnostic input modules 80 output modules 82 107 standard output modules 66 module identification information 17 ASCII text string 17 major revision 17 minor revision 17 product code 17 product type 17 retrieving 40 serial number 17 status 17 vendor ID 17 module status 17 multiple owner controllers 34 NEMA clamp RTB 117 no load detection diagnostic output modules 75 word diagnostic output modules 82 0 open wire detection 73 word diagnostic input modules 80 output data echo 31 56 field side verification 76 verify word 82 Output Data communication format 133 ownership 20 controller I 0 module relationship 20 direct connection 24 input remote connections 28 Listen only 24 34 multiple owners of input modules 34 output remote
53. 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Internal Module Operation 42701 Signal Applied atthe RTB rm m Oa Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 Refer to the following general steps when configuring I O modules 1 Configure all I O modules for a given controller by using RSLogix 5000 software and download that information to the controller 2 Ifthe I O configuration data references a scheduled connection to a module in a remote chassis connected via the ControlNet network run RSNetWorx for ControlNet software to schedule the network 3 After running RSNetWorx software perform an online save of the RSLogix 5000 project to make sure the configuration information that RSNetWorx software sends to the controller is saved IMPORTANT You must run RSNetWorx for ControlNet software whenever a new 1 0 module is added to a scheduled ControlNet chassis When a module is permanently removed from a remote chassis we recommend that you run RSNetWorx for ControlNet software to reschedule the network and optimize the allocation of network bandwidth ControlLogix I O modules experience signal propagation delays that must be accounted for during operation Some of these delays are user configurable and some are inherent to the module hardware For example there is a small delay typically less than 1 ms between when a signal is applied at the RTB of a ControlLogix input module and when a signal is sent to the system o
54. 1g L2 10 glz 2g L2 11 za 23 CD Nonisolated x 76 35 Wiring L212 9 ii A L2 13 i28 27 Additional jumper bars may be purchased 2 4 By 30 2 by using catalog number 1756 JMPR els m 2 0 s so gU Not Used 36 35 CD ph Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 IN16 ControlLogix AC 10 30V input module L NO o o 0O110 N 1 N 2 N 3 o o 9o l2 N4 o 0 o L4 N 5 N 6 N 7 N 8 N 9 N 10 N 11 N 12 N 13 oO oe N 14 oTo N 15 O oe Not Used Not Used O L1 Simplified Schematic 1756 IN16 IN 0 v wr 77 1 I Xd L2 0 m YEK L C 2 gt 3 GND i Group 0 N 7 Controllogix Display Backplane L2 0 Interface KI N 9 IR N 11 N 13 N 15 C E E EG GB ED EB ED GB L2 1 SIS ED E E EB EI 9 3 ED S isy Chain to Other RTBs 150 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 1V16 ControlLogix DC 10 30V sourcing input module
55. 24V High Speed DC Isolated Input Snk Sowos Vendor Ader Biadiey Local Descnloni Module Definition Serie A Revision 11 Electronic Keping Connection input Data Module Definition Click Change to open the Module Definition dialog box and choose additional properties such as an electronic keying method and connection format 130 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 Communication or Connection Formats The initial configuration of a module requires you to choose a communication or connection format The term used depends on the AOP for your module Earlier AOPs use communication formats and later AOPs use connection formats A communication or connection format determines the following e Available configuration options e Type of data that is transferred between the module and its owner controller e Which tags are generated when the configuration is complete IMPORTANT Communication formats cannot be changed whether online or offline after a program is downloaded to the controller However connection formats can be changed when offline after a program is downloaded to the controller The communication or connection format also defines the connection between the controller writing the configuration and the module The number and type of choices varies depending on what module you are using and whether it is in a local or remote chas
56. A communications fault sets all bits in the Module Fault word A Fuse Blown A condition sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault word A blown fuse for any point sets the bit for that point in the FuseBlown tag and also sets the appropriate bits in the Module Fault word In the example above the bit for the FuseBlown tag is set indicating a blown fuse at point 9 Bits set for the Fault input tag indicate I O data may be incorrect due to a fault due to one of these conditions e FuseBlown 1 e PWMCycleTime outside the valid range of 0 001 3600 0 seconds e PWMOnrTime outside the valid range of 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or 0 100 percent e PWMCyceIime lt PWMOnTime Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 107 Chapter5 Fast Module Features Notes 108 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Chapter 6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Topic Page Install the Module 111 Key the Removable Terminal Block 113 Connect the Wires 114 Assemble the Removable Terminal Block and Housing 119 Choose Extended depth Housing 120 Install the Removable Terminal Block 122 Remove the Removable Terminal Block 123 Remove the Module from the Chassis 125 ATTENTION Environment and Enclosure This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category Il applications as defined in IEC 60664 1 at altitudes up t
57. F 10 60 C 140 F 6 60 C 140 F 4 9 60 C 140 F 1756 0A16 16 14 only 7 per group 4 None None Only 2 per group 1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 30 C 86 F 5 30 C 86 F 6 60 C 140 F 4 60 C 140 F 1756 0A8D 8 8 8 None None 1756 0A8E 8 8 8 6 only 3 per group 6 30 C 86 F only 3 per group 4 60 C 140 F only 2 per group Table 62 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 230V AC 60 Hz Cat No Motor Starters Size 0 1 Size 2 Size3 Size4 Size 5 1756 0A161 16 16 16 16 30 C 86 F 11 30 C 86 F 13 60 C 140 F 9 60 C 140 F 1756 0A16 16 16 16 4 only 2 per group 2 only 1 per group 1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 8 Table 63 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 24V AC 60 Hz Cat No Motor Starters Size 0 1 Size 2 Size3 Size4 Size 5 1756 0N8 4 9 30 C 86 F 4 30 C 86 F None None None 3 60 C 140 F 3 60 C 140 F Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 235 AppendixE Motor Starters for Digital 1 0 Modules Determine the Maximum Number of Motor Starters To determine the maximum number of motor starters that can be used by any 1756 digital I O module refer to this example Table 64 Number of Motor Starters to be Used Step 1 Choose your motor starter Value used in this example Allen Bradley Bulletin 500 Size 3 120V AC 60 Hz 2 3 Poles Inrush 1225VA Sealed 45VA 2 Determine the number of motor starters required for
58. Features In example pattern 4 the input module triggers the event task when input points 0 3 are in the On state and input points 12 15 are in the Off state Table 21 Example Pattern 4 Output Tag Bit Position Event x Mask Event x Value Once you define a pattern you can disable an event from being triggered without clearing its output data by using the Event x Disarm output tag IMPORTANT All event masks and event values must be defined in the module s output tags You can change output tag values in program logic while normal module operation continues or through the RSLogix 5000 tag editor For more information about module tags refer to Appendix B To use a dedicated connection to trigger event tasks you must set the module s connection format to Data with Event as shown in Figure 12 For more information about connection formats see Communication or Connection Formats on page 131 TIP You can change the connection format at any time after creating anew module except when you are online The AOP will apply all the configuration data required for the new connection format Figure 12 Event Connection Format Module Definition Series Revision Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection i Data Vvith Event Input Data Timestamp Data Choose Data with Event from the Connection pull down menu Cancel When you choose the Data with Event connection f
59. I O e Output modules use all 64 bits of the timestamp to schedule so there are no limits on schedule ranges Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Mixing CST and CIP Sync Modules in a ControlLogix System CST is automatically enabled for each chassis that has been configured to use CIP Sync Therefore it is possible to include modules that use CST for their time base into systems that have been configured to use CIP Sync Also there is a direct correlation between CIP Sync system time and the local chassis CST time The CIP Sync system time and local chassis CST time are related by this equation CIP Sync system time CST time offset The offset in the above equation is a value unique to each chassis and can be obtained by using one of these methods e CSTOffset from the Wall Clock Time WCT object ofa controller in the chassis e SystemOffset from the Time Synchronize object of a controller in the chassis e LocalClockOffset returned in an I O connection from a CIP Sync capable module in the chassis The relationship described above enables CST and CIP Sync based I O to interoperate as long as the offset in the chassis containing the CST based module is accessible Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 49 Chapter3 Common Module Features Common Features Specific to Input Modules 50 Producer Consumer Communication By using
60. INT Controller Data with AND Logic Determines the output state by applying AND logic Connection Peer Ownership to these sources Output Data Data with Peer e Corresponding bits from the controller s output data 0 Data Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x OrToControllerData INT Controller Data with OR Logic Determines the output state by applying ORlogicto Connection Peer Ownership these sources Output Data Data with Peer e Corresponding bits from the controller s output data 0 Data e Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x AndToPeerlnput INT Peer Data with AND Logic Determines the output state by applying AND logic to Connection Peer Ownership these sources Output Data Data with Peer e Corresponding bits from peer input data I Data e Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x OrToPeerlnput INT Peer Data with OR Logic Determines the output state by applying OR logic to these Connection Peer Ownership sources Output Data Data with Peer e Corresponding bits from peer input data I Data e Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x AndToPeerWindow0 SINT Peer Data with AND Logic Determines the output state by applying AND logic to Connection Peer Ownership these sources Output Data Data with Peer e Corresponding bits from window 0 of the peer counter module Counter x InputWindow0 e
61. Latch of Information s es dida ebbe or dadas aces 68 Diagnose Timestamp eessbecaeqesexoasiaRk inni maiia 69 P int AC T6 Point D sscscsaterdeaten odidorwsunseargarace 70 Point level Fault Reporting ccisinvacaravonnsy aces vad Hn 70 Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules 45 71 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules 71 Open Wire Detectobuu sese oead e unbto Fon EE ED aS 73 Field Power Loss Detection see ceca dere dukegast tede fe tarea 74 Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules sse 75 Field Wiring Options eees ee etos eorr terre E rrr canes 75 No Load Detection 2254 3c bead dl hbri d haad ebd bra lb doaddd 75 Field side Output Verification eese eee eens 76 Pulse Tesh e P 78 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules 79 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers 79 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 81 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fast Module Features Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Wiring Diagrams Table of Contents Chapter 5 Fast Input Module Compatibility sxivsaivevesseveesewnny eh 83 Fast Output Module Compatibility 00 cece eee eee eee ee 84 rali M P 84 Response Timis osapea t ebq Rak Eeb asa aneri inris Pede REPE 85 Features Specific to Fas
62. Load j SETS ours epe sk OUTA srry L OUT 7 g7 OUT 6 ls T M 7 m e lies Dire 9 ones Group 0 B RTN OUT 0 OUT 11 euu OUT 10 OUT 13 gu 1 8 OUT 12 ControlLogix Electronic Fuse OUTA45 FT 16 i5 I8 OUT 14 UE Circuitry DC Ol E is v RTN OUT 0 TENE OUT 17 1 D 20 191 OUT 16 OUT19 CD 22 2 CD OUT 18 OUT 21 D 24 23 OUT 20 Surge Current Chart OUT 23 ED 26 259 OUT 22 OUT 25 Cp 28 27 OUT 24 Group 1 OUT 27 30 29 OUT 26 2A Surge OUT 29 El 32 31 OUT 28 z Continuous 60 C 140 F ouT 31 D 33 9 OUT 30 g 1A ELM DC 1 C36 35V RTN OUT 1 3 0 10 ms Time DC COM Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 173 Chapter 8 Display ControlLogix Backplane Interface 174 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0W161 ControlLogix AC 10 240V DC 5 Simplified Schematic Isolated Wiring 24V 1 0 O 110 L1 EH L2 0 112 AA gt ies OUT DC 4 O 11 4 7 tL C L1 5 L1 6 Jumper Bar zi Cut to Length 8 9 10 11 Nonisolated 12 Wiring 13 Additional jumper bars may be purchased 14 by using catalog number 1756 JMPR 15 L11 O 11 15 Not Used Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P Novem 125V isolated contact module 1756 OW161 2 e 5 d e amp
63. LocalClockOffset DINT Local Clock Timestamp Indicates the offset between the current CST and the CIP Sync Connection Data value when a valid CIP Sync time is available Output Data Scheduled per Point or Connection Listen Only Output Data None OffsetTimestamp DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates when the CIP Sync LocalClockOffset and GrandMasterlD Connection Data were last updated in CIP Sync format Output Data Scheduled per Point or Connection Listen Only Output Data None GrandMasterClocklD DINT Grandmaster Clock ID Indicates the ID of the CIP Sync Grandmaster to which the Connection Data module is synced Output Data Scheduled per Point or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Timestamp DINT Timestamp A 64 bit CIP Sync timestamp of the last new output data or FuseBlown Connection Data event Output Data Scheduled per Point or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Schedule State SINT Schedule State Indicates the current sequence number of schedules stored in the Connection Data output data Output Data Scheduled per Point Schedule SequenceNumber SINT Schedule Sequence Number The data echo indicating the sequence number of the Connection Data schedule Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Scheduled per Point 207 Appendix B Tag Definitions Table 53 1756 0B16IEFS Module Input Data Tags Data Output or Listen Only Conne
64. Only or Listen Only with Event Pt x DataOverrideEn output tag is set Input Data Timestamp Data 0 Inputs are not being overridden 1 Inputs are being overridden Pt x Timestamp Off n DINT Off to On Timestamp Records a 64 bit timestamp for the input point s last transition Connection Data Data with Event to On The timestamp is in CIP Sync time Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x Timestamp OnOff DINT On to Off Timestamp Records a 64 bit timestamp for the input point s last transition Connection Data Data with Event to Off The timestamp is in CIP Sync time Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data 191 Appendix B Appendix B Tag Definitions Table 45 1756 IB16IF Module Output Tags Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition ResetTimestamps BOOL Reset Timestamp When set clears all timestamps when a rising edge occurs Connection Data or Data with Event 0 Timestamps are not reset Input Data Timestamp Data 1 Timestamps are reset when a rising edge occurs ResetEvents BOOL Reset Event When set clears all events in the Event x NewEvent and Connection Data with Event Event x Timestamp tags when a rising edge occurs Input Data Timestamp Data 0 Events are not cleared 1 Events are cleared when a rising edge occurs L
65. Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 No fault per Module 1 Fault or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer InputPartnerActive BOOL Input Partner is Active lIndicates whether the peer input module is actively producing Connection Peer Ownership input data to be consumed by a 1756 0B16IEF module Output Data Data with Peer 0 No input peer module is currently producing input data to be consumed by a 1756 0B16lEF module 1 The input peer module is actively producing input data to be consumed by a 1756 0B16IEF module for use in its peer logic InputPartnerFault BOOL Input Partner Fault Indicates whether the peer input module has faulted due to a Connection Peer Ownership connection loss If the peer input module is faulted the output module uses only controller Output Data Data with Peer data to determine the output state 0 The input peer module has not faulted 1 The input peer module has faulted and outputs will transition to the configured Fault mode state InputPartnerSlot SINT Input Partner Slot Indicates the slot number of the peer input module Connection Peer Ownership Valid values Output Data Data with Peer 0 16 1 No peer input module is defined InputPartnerStatus SINT Input Partner Status Indicates the status of the peer input module Connection Peer Ownership Valid values Output Data Data with Peer 2 Communication Fau
66. P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Configurable Point level Output States Individual outputs can be configured to unique output states if the module goes into Program mode or Fault mode IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters Program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for Program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of outputs turn Off during Program mode whenever that module is inhibited outputs turn Off Follow these steps to configure an output state 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 1 1756 OA8 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane ott _y Off lot v ott Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel pply Hep 2 From the Program Mode pull down menu choose whether the module s output state is On or Off during Program mode e On e Off e Hold Retain current output state 3 From the Fault Mode pull down menu choose whether the module s output state during Fault mode e On e Off e Hold Retain current output state 4 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 55 Chapter 3 56 Common Module Features Output Data Echo During normal o
67. Producer Consumer communication ControlLogix I O modules can produce data without first being polled by a controller The modules produce the data and any other owner controller device can decide to consume it For example an input module produces data and any number of processors can consume the data at the same time This eliminates the need for one processor to send the data to another processor For more information about this process see Input Module Operation on page 26 Status Indicator Information Each ControlLogix digital I O module has a status indicator on the front of the module that lets you check the health and operational status of a module The status indicator displays vary for each module Status Description 1 0 status This yellow display indicates the On Off state of the field device ST IMPORTANT For the 1756 0A8D and 1756 OA8E modules the 1 0 status indicator does not illuminate without field power applied Module status This green display indicates the modules communication status OK Fault status This display is only found on some modules and indicates the presence or absence of various FLT faults Fuse status This display is only found on electronically fused modules and indicates the state of the Fuse module s fuse See Appendix A for examples of status indicators on ControlLogix digital I O modules The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix digital input modules
68. Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Available Features Chapter 1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Topic Page Available Features 13 1 0 Modules in the ControlLogix System 14 Module Identification and Status Information 1 ControlLogix digital I O modules are input and output modules that provide On Off detection and actuation By using the producer consumer network model digital I O modules can produce information when needed while providing additional system functions The table lists several features available on ControlLogix digital I O modules Feature Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP Description You can remove and insert modules and removable terminal blocks RTB while power is applied Producer consumer communication This communication method is an intelligent data exchange between modules and other system devices in which each module produces data without first being polled System time stamp of data A 64 bit system clock places a time stamp on the transfer of data between the module and its owner controller Module level fault reporting and field side diagnostic detection Fault and diagnostic detection capabilities to help you effectively and efficiently use your module and troubleshoot your application Agency Certification Class 1 Division 2 agency certification for any application that requires approval Rockwell Automation Publication 1756
69. RTB e RTB housing door is closed e The locking tab at the top of the module is unlocked 1 Align the top bottom and left side guides of the RTB with the guides on the module X X d M SEM AN KAN N UN ER LS ED Top Guide Bottom Guide 20853 M 2 Press quickly and evenly to seat the RTB on the module until the latches snap into place Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 3 Slide the locking tab down to lock the RTB onto the module 20854 M Remove the Removable If you need to remove the module from the chassis you must first remove the Terminal Block RTB from the module while the field side power is applied the module will be electrically live Do not touch the RTB5 terminals Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury ATTENTION Shock hazard exists If the RTB is removed from the module The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature It is recommended that field side power be removed before removing the module
70. Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 123 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Follow these steps to remove an RTB from the module 1 Unlock the locking tab at the top of the module 2 Open the RTB door by using the bottom tab 3 Hold the spot marked PULL HERE and pull the RTB off the module IMPORTANT Do not wrap your fingers around the entire door A shock hazard exists 20855 M 124 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 Remove the Module Follow these steps to remove a module from its chassis from the Chassis 1 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs 20856 M 2 Pull module out of the chassis FR 0 SBN EUN LAs eee eee D ese 93s LA a a SB Ww CER EJ S IS 20857 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 125 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Notes 126 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Chapter 7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Topic Page Configuration Process Overview 128 Create a New Module 129 Edit the Configuration 134 Connection Properties 135 View and Change Module Tags 136 You must configure your module upon installation The module will not work until it has been configured In most cases yo
71. Tasks shoccesessaccpobavevsipiesvasassenecsneed 28 Input Modules in a Remote Chassis iod nonesis 28 Remote Input Modules Connected via the ControlNet Network 29 Remote Input Modules Connected via the EtherNet IP Network 30 Output Module Operation ciscscsarccssdecedandas Loreeadaantiaseca 31 Output Modules ina Local Cassis ii ceeesenkreek i ehh rebbeR E eens 31 Output Modules in a Remote Chassis 4 8 esse sare tbe 32 Remote Output Modules Connected via the ControlNet Network 32 Remote Output Modules Connected via the EtherNet IP Network 33 Listen only Medex iiie Lebe cad Ped ex d na PER CES dU R Ed pex E 34 Multiple Owner Controllers of Input Modules Le 34 Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners 35 Chapter 3 Input Module Compatbllby s cessare epo ttr RR PE RR e ETUR 37 Output Module Compatibility 222 coord ete he yeu eee 38 Common Peatutes 22 seece re ed creber RE IX ea One e d ex rx e Ra dne 39 Removal and Insertion Under Power unuunu 39 Module Fault Reporting 221222499 25 pridie boo Cada debe ets 39 Software Cou DIG sos eda IARE rme KaDaR EEA 40 Electronic Keying sisser videa EF EEPRERCRRETA DR PPP ewes 40 Module Inhibiting sg Rreor hdd Radar dd iberiera Mega iran 46 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 5 Table of Contents Diagnostic Module Features Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs 47 Producer Consumer Communicat
72. Wire Q EN i g E Vv v v v D F r F F Q077 7171717171II SII 717171717171XP SII IV Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do the following in the Enable Change of State column e To enable the input module to send new data to the owner controller at the RPI on input COS if it is enabled and if a diagnostic fault occurs check the corresponding Off gt On or On Off checkbox for a point e To disable the feature clear the corresponding checkbox for a point Real time data is not sent when a diagnostic fault occurs but is still sent at the specified RPI or on input COS ifit is enabled 3 Click OK 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 Open Wire Detection Open Wire is used to verify the field wiring is connected to the module The field device must provide a minimum leakage current to function properly A leakage resistor must be placed across the contacts of an input device The resulting current is then expected to exist when the input is open For more information see each module s specifications in Chapter 8 When an Open Wire condition is detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point fault This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault Follow t
73. Wiring DC 0 O____ DC 2 0 Sinking Output Wiring DC 6 O4 4 Jumper Bar Cut to Length Nonisolated Wiring Dch o fo s DC 0 DC 1 DC 2 DC 3 DC 4 DC 5 DC 6 DC 7 DC 8 DC 9 DC 10 DC 11 DC 12 DC 13 DC 14 DC 15 DC 15 1756 0B161 UT 0 Th JD UT 1 1 UT2 UT 3 UT 4 LO UT 5 Ki ga e e eo UT 6 D n UT 8 UT 9 UT 10 UT 11 UT 12 Dy wy UT 13 UT 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OUT 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UT 15 3j c E B3 n 3 E B EH Not Used Not Used i g Not Used x Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Isolated Sourcing Output Wiring O DC 0 o 00 21 Oo DC 6 Nonisolated Sourcing Output Wiring DC Additional jumper bars may be purchased by using catalog number 1756 JMPR 163 Chapter 8 Simplified Schematic Wiring Diagrams 1756 0B161EF ControlLogix DC 10 30V electronically protected sinking or sourcing isolated fast output module E Fault Display ControlLogix Backplane Interface Surge Current Chart
74. edge of output logic Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 99 Chapter5 Fast Module Features If the output logic turns Off before the cycle limit is reached you can configure the pulse cycles to continue until the cycle limit is reached by enabling the Execute All Cycles option Figure 16 shows a cycle limit of 2 with the Execute All Cycles option enabled Figure 16 PWM Cycle Limit with Execute All Cycles Option Output Logic Output State A Both cycles are executed even though the output logic turned Off before the cycle limit was reached Minimum On Time Extend Cycle and Stagger Output The Minimum On Time Extend Cycle and Stagger Output configuration options are useful in time proportional control applications such as temperature control In these applications PID calculations compare the actual temperature to the desired setpoint and vary the PWM On time to a heating element in real time to regulate temperature as it approaches the setpoint as shown in Figure 17 Figure 17 PWM for Time Proportioned Control Heated Vessel Variable PWM On Time from PID Calculation Temperature Feedback to Analog Input 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 In this type of application the Minimum On Time Extend Cycle and Stagger Output configuration options provide these benefits e Minimum On Time and Extend Cycle E
75. for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 IA8D 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D120 Status indicating Standard with 120V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120N Narrow standard with 120V AC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120A 2 120V AC with extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20F FS120A 4 Fusible Two 4 point isolated groups with four terminals per input and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 1A16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D120 Status indicating Standard with 120V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120N Narrow standard with 120V AC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120A 2 120V AC with extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20F F120A 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse status indicators 1756 IA161 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS120A 4 Fusible Isolated with 120 V AC status indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Isolated 120V AC DC with four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS120A 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input 1756 1432 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable
76. for outputs 1492 IFM40F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1756 0W16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output ane 1492 IFM40DS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1492 IMF40F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC blown fuse indicators 1492 IMF40F FS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IMF40F FS240 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1756 0X8l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output V 1492 IFM40DS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four termi
77. if communication fails 1 Outputs go to Fault mode if communication fails FaultMode BOOL Fault Mode Used in conjunction with the FaultValue tag to determine the state of Connection Data outputs when a communication failure occurs Output Data Scheduled per 0 Uses the output value defined in the Pt x FaultValue configuration tag default Point 1 Holds the last state of the output for the length of time defined in the FaultValueStateDuration tag If PWM is enabled for the output point and the output is currently On the output will continue PWM until the cycle limit is reached or a final fault state goes into effect via the FaultFinalState tag FaultValue BOOL Fault Value Defines the output value when a fault occurs Holds the configured state of Connection Data the output for the length of time defined in the FaultValueStateDuration tag Output Data Scheduled per Requires the corresponding bit in the FaultMode tag to be cleared Point 0 0ff 1 0n 202 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Table 50 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Scheduled per Point Output continued Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition FaultFinalState BOOL Fault Final State Determines the final output state once the time in the Connection Data FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses Output Data Scheduled per 0 Output turns Off once the time in the Fa
78. is synchronized it will correct errors by slowly ramping to the master s time Bit2 0 not time master 1 time master that is controller Bit3 0 time not synced 1 time synced with master Size of timer in bits CST_Information 10 CST_Timer_Size INT 2 Unused CST_Information 12 CST_reserved 8 WHO_ Information SINT 47 Device manufacturer s vendor ID 1 AB WHO Information 0 WHO vendor 2 INT Device s product type 7 Digital 1 0 WHO Information 2 WHO product type 2 INT Device s catalog code which maps to its catalog number WHO Information 4 WHO catalog code 2 INT Device s major revision WHO Information 6 WHO major revision 1 SINT Device s minor revision WHO Information 7 WHO minor revision 1 SINT Device5 internal status WHO_Information 8 WHO_ status 2 Bit 0 0 unowned 1 owned INT Bit 2 0 unconfigured 1 configured Bits 7 4 forms a 4 bit number indicating Device Specific Status For Digital 1 0 0 Self Test 1 Flash update in progress 2 Communication fault 3 Not owned 4 Unused 5 Internal fault module needs to be flash updated 6 Run mode 7 Program mode N A for input modules Bit 8 0 no fault 1 Minor recoverable fault that is backplane error detected Bit 9 0 no fault 1 Minor non recoverable fault Bit 10 0 no fault 1 Major recoverable fault Bit 11 0 no fault 1 Major non recoverable fault that is module needs to be reflashed Bits 15 12 unused Device s se
79. j FAN OUT 0 V e T RTN OUT 0 C D r ControlLogix Backplane Interface lt Display Surge Current Chart Surge gi JES z Continuous 60 C 140 F 5 05A T w 0 10ms Time Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0B32 OUT 1 Diz 1 Di jouro X Group 0 OUT 3 amp 4 3 OUT 2 OUT 5 De sg OUT 4 OUT 7 Als 7 IE OUT 6 2 our Teh DL ours RTBs OUT 11 epa n E OUT 10 Group 0 OUT 13 Dia 13 e OUT 12 OUT 15 he 15 amp OUT 14 DC 0 4 Dis 17 q RTN OUT 0 OUT17 UO 2o 19 E OUT 16 OUT 19 Cm nd OUT 18 OUT 21 CD 24 23 d OUT 20 OUT 23 CD e 25 OUT 22 Group 1 OUT25 CDgs 27 SD OUT 24 Group 1 0UT 27 a 30 29 d OUT 26 OUT 29 3231 OUT 28 OUT 31 33 OUT 30 DC 1 Dls 35 E RTN OUT 1 DC COM Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 167 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0C8 ControlLogix DC 30 60V output module Simplified Schematic Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 0C8 DC 0 2 a 45V DC 0 OUT 0 1 m BE T s 2 DC 0
80. length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40D120A 2 Status indicating 120V AC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1756 1B16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20F F24A 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for inputs 1756 IB16D 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40DS24A 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F F24AD 4 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Fusible Fused with 24V DC blown fuse low leakage indicators four isolated groups and four terminals per input Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input Isolated with 120V AC DC with four terminals per input Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 x cable length 241 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued
81. loss If you use Disabled Keying you must take full responsibility for understanding whether the module being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the application 44 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 EXAMPLE In the following scenario Disable Keying prevents 1 0 communication The module configuration is for a 1756 1A16 digital input module The physical module is a 1756 IF 16 analog input module In this case communication is prevented because the analog module rejects the data formats that the digital module configuration requests Module Configuration Vendor Allen Bradley m o Product Type Digital Input Module e ees Catalog Number 1756 1A16 oom Com Femme roa Date Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 1 Rewer ra Electric ming Dati Lr me ce Communication is prevented Physical Module Vendor Allen Bradley Product Type Analog Input Module Catalog Number 1756 IF16 Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 2 EXAMPLE In the following scenario Disable Keying allows 1 0 communication The module configuration is for a 1756 1A16 digital input module The physical module is a 1756 IB16 digital input module In this case communication is allowed because the two digital modules share common data formats Module Configuration Vendor Allen Bradley m MM Product Type Digital Input Module w ee Catal
82. may occur See Point level Fault Reporting on page 70 IMPORTANT The pulse test does not guarantee a fuse will blow when the output point turns On It merely indicates a blown fuse is possible Detect a No Load condition No Load detection can only detect a fault when an output point is in the Off state with an output On However you can use a pulse test when an output module is in an On state to determine whether operating conditions for a point may cause a No Load condition If you perform a pulse test on an output point while it is in the On state the output point is commanded to be Off briefly The pulse test reports a failure because conditions when the point is Off indicate the possible absence of a field device in this case though the No Load bit will not be set See Point level Fault Reporting on page 70 IMPORTANT The Pulse Test does not guarantee the absence of a load It merely indicates a No Load condition is possible Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules If the Diagnostic Change of State feature is enabled a diagnostic output module sends new data to the owner controller when one of the events described in the table occurs Table 11 Diagnostic Change of State Events Description Receipt of output data Output module
83. of each task as well as at the RPI as described earlier in this section if your application uses these components e 1756 CNB D or 1756 CNBR D modules RSLogix 5000 software version 8 02 00 or later Remote Output Modules Connected via the EtherNet IP Network When remote digital output modules are connected to the owner controller via an EtherNet IP network the controller sends output data at these times e When the RPI timer expires e When an Immediate Output IOT instruction if programmed is executed An IOT sends data immediately and resets the RPI timer e When a new schedule is created for a 1756 OBIGIEFS module from the motion planner for a cam that has been armed by an MAOC instruction Because the 1756 OBIGIEFS module is the only 1756 module that can be used in a remote chassis with the MAOC instruction it is the only module that receives output data in this scenario Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 33 Chapter 2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Listen only Mode Multiple Owner Controllers of Input Modules 34 Initial Configuration Any controller in the system can listen to the data from any I O module such as input data echoed output data or echoed diagnostic information Even ifa controller does not own a module or hold the module s configuration data the controller can still listen to the module During the module configuration process you c
84. operational status of the module e Output Structure of output data processed by the input module IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 software version 18 02 00 and 19 01 00 output tag information is sent to the 1756 IB16IF module only at the RPI rate defined during configuration For optimal performance use an Immediate Output IOT instruction For example the rung shown below contains an IOT instruction for a fast input module in slot 3 Add a similar rung to your last routine within the Main Task to mimic normal output tag processing OT Immediate Output Update Tag Local 3 0 e Event Structure of event data continually sent from the I O module to the controller or a listening module containing the current operational status of the module Fast input modules use array data structures Array data structures differ from the flat data structures of other digital I O modules For more information see Array Data Structures on page 211 IMPORTANT The Module Definition column in each table lists the connection type and input data type combinations that are required to create the corresponding tag For more information about defining connection and input data types see Create a New Module on page 129 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 189 Appendix B Tag Definitions Table 43 1756 IB16IF Module Configuration Tags Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition LatchTi
85. pa om 244 E0 291 N 14 y using catalog number 1756 JMPR 1215 Pepi aa Nas i 2 O0 U 5 Id 34 33 Q Not Used x Not used Cplse ss d Not Used T en Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 140 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 1A32 ControlLogix AC 74 132V input module Simplified Schematic 1756 1A32 IN 0 T Int e RE N 0 1 7 E ck te na fee siepr 2 F VVV ES lt Vac T L2 0 gt o 2 Y ZEE Group 0 INS Jls 5k N 4 Group 0 3 AR l 1o 0M IN 7 lg 7 N 6 i GND i Daisy Chain IN 9 go 9 amp N 8 to Other RTBs N41 O 2 ne N 10 ControlLogix Display N 13 14 13 a N 12 Backplane N 15 16 15 N 14 Interface e Oy Oy ay Oy oy toy fay 03 a X N 8 T Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 141 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 1B16 ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V input module Simplified Schematic 175
86. performed on user demand such as fuse reset or diagnostic latch reset Backplane side of the interface to the I O module A named area of the controller s memory where data is stored A ControlLogix process that stamps a change in input data with a relative time reference of when that change occurred Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 A agency certification Class Division 2 UL CSA FM CE 68 array data structure 211 assemble RTB 119 C cage clamp RTB 116 Change of State COS data transmissions 27 diagnostic change of state 72 modules 72 79 CIP Sync time 48 49 202 209 224 Class I Division 2 certification 68 communication format 131 producer consumer model 31 communication format about 131 CST Timestamped Fuse Data 133 CST Timestamped Input Data 132 Full Diagnostic Input Data 132 Full Diagnostics 133 Input Data 132 Listen Only 132 133 Output Data 133 Rack Optimization 132 133 Scheduled Output Data 133 usage tip 131 configure fault state delay 96 input filter time 53 input filter times 90 modules with RSLogix 5000 software 40 peer ownership 84 per point timestamping 87 point level output states 55 pulse width modulation 103 connection direct 23 format 131 rack optimized 23 24 connection format about 131 Data 132 133 Data with Event 94 106 132 Listen Only 132 133 Listen Only with Event 132 Peer Input with Data 133 ControlNet network i
87. protection is based on a thermal cutout principal In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cutout temperature has been reached Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19 2V DC The output channels that are affected by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module master CPU bridge and so forth What this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels should be checked and reset if a short circuit on one channel occurs 2 The output cannot turn On due to hardware point damage 3 Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned Off 4 Itis not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the Off state If a short circuit occurs the point is turned Off and the fault appears in the Off state until that point is reset 5 When the pulse test is executed it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display 6 During normal operating conditions hardware damage should not be possible An output shorted to GND may temporarily cause a hardware point fault See output shorted to GND as a possible cause Features Specific to The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix dia
88. publication 1492 TD008 Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical ation Instructions publication 1756 IN592 and the ControlLogix Sequence of Events Module User Manual publication 1756 UM528 IMPORTANT For the latest 1 0 module specifications see the 1756 ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Technical Specifications publication 1756 TD002 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 IA8D ControlLogix AC 79 132V diagnostic input module Simplified Schematic 1756 IA8D 5V ne eee p i Not Used IED HEB Li 0 Loss of Field Power d 2 uw Daisy Chainto i 3 S Aag Input Other RTBs L2 0 ia ig N 0 W i t 4 1 H L t m e Display lt m E I7 Ri L GND A iD KD 4sy ControlLogix Backplane Group 0 12 0 ia Ie N2 Group jy 12W L Interface wy 0 5 Resistor w L2 0 i H N 3 Y AEK OpenWire CD KD 1 j IU I t 4 e Display L2 1 N 4 TE e DO gt ControlLogix Backplane L2 1 ig ig N 5 47 KQ 1 2 W Interface ie 5 5 Resistor roup 1 L2 1 N 6 d 17 L2 1 CD ie N 7 U U L2 1 ig ia L1 1 Loss of Field Pow L2 CA L1 ControlLogix AC 74 132V input module
89. sends data when it echoes back to the owner controller Diagnostic change of state Output module sends data when any change in the diagnostics output point occurs Unlike diagnostic input modules this feature cannot be disabled for diagnostic output modules There is no Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions checkbox on the Configuration tab to check or clear for diagnostic output modules ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules multicast fault and status data to any owner controller or listening controller All diagnostic input modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules use additional words to indicate fault conditions The following table lists the fault words and the associated tags that can be examined in program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a diagnostic input module Table 12 Fault Words on Diagnostic Input Modules Word Tag Name Description Module fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital input modules Field Power Loss FieldPwrLoss Indicates loss of field power to a group on the module Available on the 1756 IA8D only For more information see Field Power Loss Detection on page 74 Open Wire OpenWire Indicates the loss of a wire from a point on the module For more information see Open Wire Detection on page 73 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each modules d
90. sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word An open wire condition on any point sets the bit for that point in the open wire word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word 41456 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules multicast fault and status data to any owner controller or listening controller Like input modules output modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting However some output modules use additional words to indicate fault conditions The table lists the fault words and the associated tags that can be examined in program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a diagnostic output module Table 14 Fault Words on Diagnostic Output Modules Word Tag Name Description Module fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital output modules Fuse Blown FuseBlown Indicates a blown fuse for a point on the module For more information see For more information see Electronic Fusing on page 57 No Load NoLoad Indicates a loss of a load from a point on the module For more information see No Load Detection on page 75 Output Verify OutputVerify In
91. shown in Figure 22 on page 179 Table 32 Status Indicators for Output Modules Indicator Status Description OK Status Steady green The outputs are actively being controlled by a system processor Flashing green The module has passed internal diagnostics but is not actively controlled or it is inhibited or controller is in Program mode Uninhibit connection establish connection or transition controller to Run mode to enable communication to module Steady red The module must be replaced Flashing red Previously established communication has timed out Check the controller and chassis communication 1 0 Status Yellow The output is On Fuse Status Red A short overload fault has occurred for a point in this group Check the wiring for a short overload Also check the Module Properties dialog box in RSLogix 5000 software and reset the fuse Fault Status Red The output has encountered a fault Check the output point at the controller Diagnostic Status Steady red The output has encountered a fault Check the output point at the controller Flashing red The output is listening for peer inputs and using the inputs to determine the state of the output point Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Troubleshoot Your Module Appendix A Figure 22 Output Module Status Indicators by Catalog Number
92. the controller is in Program mode 0 Uses the output value defined in the ProgValue tag default 1 Holds the last state of the output If PWM is enabled for the output point and the Output Data Data Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition ProgloFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Mode Enables the transition of outputs to Fault mode if a Connection Data communication failure occurs in Program mode Otherwise outputs will remain in Output Data Data Program mode See FaultMode FaultValue ProgMode and ProgValue 0 Outputs stay in Program mode if communication fails 1 Outputs go to Fault mode if communication fails Pt x FaultMode BOOL Fault Mode Used in conjunction with the FaultValue tag to determine the state of Connection Data outputs when a communication failure occurs Output Data Data 0 Uses the output value defined in the Pt x FaultValue configuration tag default 1 Holds the last state of the output for the length of time defined in the FaultValueStateDuration tag If PWM is enabled for the output point and the output is currently On the output will continue PWM until the cycle limit is reached or a final fault state goes into effect via the FaultFinalState tag Pt x FaultValue BOOL Fault Value Defines the output value when a fault occurs Holds the configured state of Connection Data the output for the length of time defined in the FaultValueStateDuration tag Output Data Data Requires the cor
93. the system clock from its local chassis when the input data changes and diagnostic data 1756 IA8D 1756 IB16D Listen Only Full Diagnostic Input Data Table 27 Input Module Connection Formats This format has the same definition as Full diagnostic input data except that it is a Listen only connection Connection Format Input Data Data Return Data Timestamp Data Module returns input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync system time To configure per point timestamping see page 87 Data Module returns input data without COS timestamps This format is useful when the highest possible throughput is required Data with Event Timestamp Data Results in two input connections Connection to return input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync system time Connection to initiate event tasks See page 93 Listen Only Timestamp Data These formats have the same definition as those above except that they are Listen only connections Data Listen Only with Event Timestamp Data 132 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1756 IA8D 1756 IB16D Module 1756 IB16IF Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 The tables below describe the communication and connection formats available for output modules Table 28 Output Module Communication Formats Communication Format Data Return Output Data The owner controller sends the module only output data Scheduled O
94. to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079 15 and EN 60079 0 WARNING A A ATTENTION This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation e This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments e This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation e Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Zone 2 environments e This equipment must be used only with ATEX certified Rockwell Automation backplanes e Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product e Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous 110 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 Install the Module You can install or remove a ControlLogix I O module while chassis power is applied Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP provides the flexibility to maintain modules without having to stop production A A gt
95. transitions default Outputs will turn On immediately when the Data tag is set to 1 beginning the PWM cycle with a rising edge 1 Staggers output On transitions All outputs configured for PWM staggering will turn On at different intervals to minimize a possible power surge if many outputs became energized simultaneously Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMCycleLimitEnable BOOL Enable PWM Cycle Limit Determines whether to allow only a fixed number of pulse cycles to occur Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag 0 Pulse cycles continue to occur until the output turns Off default 1 Allows only the number of pulse cycles defined via the PWM CycleLimit tag to occur Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMExecuteAllCycles BOOL Execute All PWM Cycles Determines whether to execute the number of cycles defined via the PWM CycleLimit tag regardless of the output logic Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag and a cycle limit to be enabled via the PWM CycleLimitEnable tag 0 The output logic determines the number of cycles to produce default 12 The PWM CycleLimit tag determines the number of cycles to produce regardless of output logic For example if you specify a cycle limit of 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles all 4 cycles will still occur despite the output being instructed to turn Off Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012
96. use sinking or sourcing wiring Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 67 Chapter4 Diagnostic Module Features Diagnostic Output ControlLogix diagnostic output modules are capable of directly driving the Module C ompatibility ControlLogix diagnostic digital inputs When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For more information on the compatibility of motor starters with ControlLogix output modules see Appendix E Diagnostic Features The table below lists features common to all ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules Diagnostic I O modules also have the common module features described in Chapter 3 Topic Page Diagnostic Latch of Information 68 Diagnostic Timestamp 69 8 Point AC 16 Point DC 70 Point level Fault Reporting 70 Diagnostic Latch of Information Diagnostic latching allows diagnostic I O modules to latch a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears The Point column on the left side of the Configuration tab lets you set diagnostic latching to occur for a specific point where the field device is wired to the I O module Follow these steps to enable or disable diagnostic latching 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics
97. uses either type of data structure depending on how you configure the module For more information see page 202 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 211 AppendixB Tag Definitions Notes 212 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Using Message Instructions Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Tre age UsingMessageinstructions OB Processing Real time Control and Module Services 214 One Service Performed Per Instruction 214 Create a New Tag 214 You can use ladder logic to perform run time services on your module For example page 59 shows how to reset an electronic fuse module by using RSLogix 5000 software This appendix provides an example of how to reset the same fuse without using RSLogix 5000 software In addition to performing run time services you can use ladder logic to change configuration Chapter 7 explained how to use the RSLogix 5000 software to set configuration parameters in your ControlLogix digital I O module Some of those parameters may also be changed through ladder logic In ladder logic you can use Message instructions to send occasional services to any ControlLogix I O module Message instructions send an explicit service to the module causing specific behavior to occur For example unlatching a high alarm can be performed by a message instruction Message instructions maintain the followin
98. your application 12 size 3 motor starters 3 Choose a ControlLogix digital output module 1756 0A16l e Output voltage 74 265V AC e Output steady state current per point 2A maximum 30 C 86 F e amp 1A maximum 60 C 140 F Linear derating e Output steady state current per module 5A maximum 30 C 86 F amp 4A maximum 60xC linear derating e Output surge current p 20A maximum for 43 ms repeatable every 2 s 60 C 140 F 4 Determine the maximum environmental operating temperature 50 C 122 F 5 Confirm the voltage range is within the motor starter range Motor starter uses 120V AC 1756 0A16l operates in a 74 120V AC voltage range 6 Confirm the inrush current per point Inrush of motor starter Line voltage Inrush current 1225VA 120V AC 10 2 A Inrush 7 Confirm the steady state point current of the module can drive the motor starter Sealed Line voltage Steady state current 45VA 120V AC 0 375 A 50 C 122 F Output point current can drive 2 A 033 mA x 10 C 2 A 0 33 A 1 67 A 50 C 122 F Above 30 C 86 F output point derates to 033 mA C point derating The 1756 0A161 output point current 1 67A can drive the motor starter 0 375 A 50 C 122 F 8 Confirm the 1756 0A16I A total module current can drive 12 size 3 motor starters 50 C 122 F 236 Motor starter steady state current x 11 motor st
99. 0 Disable 1 Enable Table 36 Diagnostic Input Module Data Tags Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to indicate the time that data changed see 8 bytes COSOffOnEn COSOnOffEn COSStatus DiagCOSDisable and or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred see OpenWireEn Field PwrLossEn Data DINT Input Status On Off status for each input point 1 hit per point 0 Off 1 0n Fault DINT Fault Status An ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and input data for that point may be incorrect 1 bit per point Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost or inhibited then all points for the module will be faulted by the processor 0 No fault 1 Fault OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault FieldPwrLoss DINT Field Power Loss AC input diagnostic detects that field power has failed or is disconnected from the module Open 1 bit per point Wire also is detected 0 No fault 1 Fault OpenWire DINT Open Wire Diagnostic that detects that a wire has been disconnected from the input point If a group of points shows 1 bit per point this fault then possible the return L1 or GND is missing from the module Also see FieldPwrLoss 0 No fault 1 Fault Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 185 AppendixB Tag Defin
100. 0 07 00 or later the Message Configuration dialog boxes changed significantly to make it easier for you to configure your messages e For example in version 9 00 00 or earlier depending on the Message Type you are required to configure some combination of the following Service Code Object Type Object ID Object Attribute Source Number of Elements Destination e n version 10 07 00 or later after you choose a Service Type RSLogix 5000 software fills in most of the fields listed above The fields you must fill in are dependent on what Service Type you choose For example with the Reset Electronic Fuse service you must know only the Source Element and the Destination The following section shows how to configure messages with RSLogix 5000 software version 10 07 00 or later A table describes the relationship of the fields in both dialog boxes so you can configure messages by using RSLogix 5000 software version 9 00 00 or earlier Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 217 AppendixC Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Configuration Tab The Configuration tab provides information on what module service to perform and where to perform it RSLogix 5000 Software Version 9 00 00 or Earlier RSLogix 5000 Software Version 10 07 00 or Later Message Configuration Slot4 Ch Reset Fuse Lx axi Configuration Communication Configuration Communication Tag Mess
101. 0 us for outputs 0 15 on the 1756 OBIGIEFS module You can also use outputs 8 15 on the 1756 OB16IS module with the MAOC instruction However only outputs 0 7 have 100 us resolution Outputs 8 15 are updated at the motion coarse update rate For more information about using the MAOC instruction with scheduled output modules refer to the Position based Output Control with the MAOC Instruction Application Technique publication 1756 AT017 Module Major Revision Considerations with Timestamping When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I O modules the following conditions may occur depending on the module s major revision e Ifthe module has a Major Revision 1 it always returns a positive timestamping value e Ifthe module has a Major Revision gt 2 it returns a negative timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the owner controller and the first change of state condition occurs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 63 Chapter3 Common Module Features Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers Module fault Word All Modules Use the Module Properties dialog box in RSLogix 5000 software to determine if the module has been synchronized with the owner controller and whether the controller is synchronized with the CST For more information on synchronizing owner controllers and modules with the CST see the ControlLogix System Us
102. 00 controller begins communicating with a module this set of keying attributes is considered Attribute Description Vendor The manufacturer of the module for example Allen Bradley Product Type The general type of the module for example communication adapter AC drive or digital 1 0 Product Code The specific type of module generally represented by its catalog number such as 1756 IB161 Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities and data exchange formats of the module Typically a later major revision supports at least all of the data formats supported by an earlier major revision of the same catalog number Minor Revision A number that indicates the module s specific firmware revision Minor revisions typically do not impact data compatibility but may indicate performance or behavior improvement You can find revision information on the General tab of a module s Properties dialog box Figure 8 General Tab Revision 7 1 E Electronic Keying Compatible Keying X Compatible Kevina Disable Keying Exact Match IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the 1 0 communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a loss of data Exact Match Exact Match keying requires all keying attributes that is Vendor Product Type Product Code catalog number Major Revision and Minor Revision of the physical module and the module created in th
103. 012 133 Chapter7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Edit the Configuration After you add a module to the I O configuration in RSLogix 5000 software you can review and edit the configuration You can also download the data to the controller while online This is called dynamic reconfiguration Follow these steps to edit a module s configuration 1 On the Controller Organizer right click an I O module and choose Properties RSLogix 5000 Digital Test 1756 174 20 1 File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help Bulk amp Be c Offline D E RUN F No Forces b E Ok I Energy Storage No Edits amp E uo Redundancy Bd Controller Organizer 3 Controller Digital Test H E Tasks 4 Motion Groups Add On Instructions Gi Data Types Trends 3 8 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fa 1 1756 L74 Digital Test 56 IB16D Diagnostigs z ueb 8 tn g 5 a 2 P amp Cut Ctrl x B Copy Ctrl C e Paste Ctrl Delete Del Cross Reference Ctrl E Print 2 On the Module Properties dialog box click the tab corresponding to the feature to modify and then click OK e To configure connection properties between the module and the controller see page 135 e To configure features common to all modules see Chapter 3 e To configure features specific to diagnostic modules see Chapter 4 e To configure features specific to fast module
104. 02 00 and 19 01 00 output tag information is sent to the 1756 OB16IEF module only at the RPI rate defined during configuration For optimal performance use an Immediate Output IOT instruction For example the rung shown below contains an IOT instruction for a fast output module in slot 3 Add a similar rung to your last routine within the Main Task to mimic normal output tag processing OT Immediate Output Update Tag Local 3 0 The 1756 OB16IEF module uses array data structures Array data structures differ from the flat data structures of other digital I O modules For more information see Array Data Structures on page 211 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Table 47 1756 0B16IEF Module Configuration Tags Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition ProgloFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Mode Enables the transition of outputs to Fault mode if a Connection Data communication failure occurs in Program mode Otherwise outputs will remain in Output Data Data or Scheduled Program mode See Pt x FaultMode Pt x FaultValue Pt x ProgMode and Pt x ProgValue per Module 0 Outputs stay in Program mode if communication fails or 1 Outputs go to Fault mode if communication fails Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer InputPartnerSlot SINT Peer Partner Slot ldentifies the slot number of the local chassis where t
105. 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 modules and the 1492 CABLExY cable can be used with the 1756 0B16D module However due to the 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 and 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 module s blown fuse leakage current rating the no load diagnostic function of the 1756 0B16D module will not indicate a blown or removed fuse as a no load condition If you require this diagnostic to function for a blown or removed fuse you must use a 1492 IFM40F F24D 2 module Expandable to 16 by using a XIM24 8R or XIMF 24 2 module Do not use this module in Output Sinking mode with fused IFM modules The IFM module fuses will not properly protect the circuit One 1492 XIM24 16RF module is to be used with one 1492 XIM4024 16R or 1492 XIM4024 16RF master 32 pt only S amp S Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 247 AppendixG 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules The following tables describe the prewired module ready cables and connectors available for your ControlLogix digital I O modules Table 66 Module Ready Cables Cat No No of Conductors Conductor Size Nominal Outer Diameter RTB at the 1 0 Module End 1492 CABLExU 20 0 326 mm 22 AWG 9 0 mm 0 36 in 1756 TBNH 1492 CABLExV 1492 CABLExW 1492 CABLExX 1492 CABLExY 40 11 7 mm 0 46 in 1756 TBCH 1492 CABLExZ Cables are available in lengths of 0 5 m 1 0 m 2 5 m and 5 0 m To order insert the code for the desired cable length into the catalog numbe
106. 16IEFS module 202 Added the 1756 OB16IEFS module to the list of IFMs 245 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 3 Summary of Changes Notes 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Preface What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Common Module Features Table of Contents Spadio 5000 Environment can bat eoo beta dab Ordo Sacr radieri rei 11 Additional Resources icu5 00s cene ou de e Ek ana VE EY eniak 12 Chapter 1 Available Eedkut suc esso veotus 6o Pa eR CUN FE OU DE OLOR TOP N UNSY 13 I O Modules in the ControlLogix System ssseesseeee 14 Module Identification and Status Information 005 17 Chapter 2 Ownership 20 Use RSNet Worx and RSLogix 5000 Software 0c eee ee 20 Internal Module Operatlonzessesvesnes ondas dete I IR ERERR RT 21 Input MAGIC adus soi dde seduce date bu eia acce reddo 21 Output Modules i gccniscncienspeasevereieavarsdinvdeewvasadan 22 CCODDECHODB uses chad np veb das e epp aeee ass eere aian ki 23 Direct Connections MES 24 Rack optimized Conbeclols oven bp REF A PEDE TRECE CERE 24 Suggestions for Rack optimized Connections 4 26 Input Module OBSEHEUB ncnccmsnd cuscdudmbancesiisapasdawneuaaaes 26 Input Modules in a Local Chassis 5 o ere eet rrr etre 27 r A EE E eee DUDAS E 27 COS Herm 27 Trigger Event
107. 1756 0B16E 10 31 2V DC 16 point electronically fused output module 162 1756 0B16l 10 30V DC 16 point isolated output module 163 1756 0B16lEF 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast peer control output module 164 1756 OB161EFS 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast scheduled per point output module 165 1756 OB16IS 10 30V DC scheduled isolated output module 166 1756 0832 10 31 2V DC 32 point output module 167 1756 0C8 30 60V DC8 point output module 168 1756 0616 Transitor transitor logic TTL output module 169 1756 0H81 90 146V DC 8 point isolated output module 170 1756 0N8 10 30V AC8 point output module 171 1756 0V16E 10 30V DC 16 point electronically fused sinking current output module 172 1756 0V32E 10 30V DC 32 point electronically fused sinking current output module 173 1756 OW16l 10 265V 5 150V DC 16 point isolated contact module 174 1756 0X8l 10 265V 5 150V DC 8 point isolated contact module 175 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 15 Chapter 1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Figure 1 Parts Illustration 16 EE a ncoureu 8 3 ay sroizsas0r d ao 6 Removable Terminal Block E J mL
108. 492 IFM40F FS 2 Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1756 0B16E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard TRG 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1492 XIM2024 8R Relay Master 20 pin master with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIM2024 16R 20 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays 1492 XIM2024 16RF 20 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays with fusing 1492 XIM24 8R Relay Expander Expander with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIMF F24 2 Fusible Expander Expander with eight 24V channels with blown fuse indicators 1492 XIMF 2 Feed through Expander Expander with eight feed through channels 1756 0B16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1756 0B16IEF T x cable length 1756 OB16IEES 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and fou
109. 56 OB16IEFS modules use CIP Sync for both timestamps and scheduling CIP Sync is a CIP implementation of the IEEE 1588 PTP Precision Time Protocol CIP Sync provides accurate real time Real World Time or Universal Coordinated Time UTC synchronization of controllers and devices connected over CIP networks This technology supports highly distributed applications that require timestamping sequence of events recording distributed motion control and increased control coordination The 1756 IB16IF 1756 OBIGIEF and 1756 OB16IEFS modules are CIP Sync slave only devices There must be another module on the network that will function as a master clock For more information on how to use CIP Sync technology see the Integrated Architecture and CIP Sync Configuration Application Technique publication IA AT003 Fast I O modules can be used to capture timestamps and schedule outputs like CST based modules while providing the following advantages e Fast I O modules have much higher precision than CST based modules e Inputs are timestamped by point so multiple inputs can be configured for COS without losing timestamp data e CIP Sync is system wide so timestamp and schedule values are consistent across all modules in the system For instance using 1756 IB16IF input timestamps to schedule outputs on a 1756 OB16IEF module means the controller input module and output module are not restricted to the same chassis as is the case with CST based
110. 6 1B16 IN 0 m IN KD KD INO J a 1 sU LIED ee GND 0 T MES Y aj E ce s kb iS GND i j E Dio Bie E oe Die M w KD KD ees Nas es D os I IEB DC COM 142 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 IB16D ControlLogix DC 10 30V diagnostic input module Simplified Schematic Input 45y ControlLogix Daisy Chain to Other TBs _ _175 1B16D IN 0 i Backplane C e ws ah elio ee HE Interface Display GND 0 n 4 Spp IN EN n A GNDO gie so N2 Leakage Resistor I YR GND O Fis 7Ep l I 1 EN GND 1 l0 VEE INA GND 0 un t i Group 1 Qe nep Ns Grou 3 Y K Qu me Ne C ka i 3 l C oO i G16 5E IN 7 ND Dis wT Ins i 20 19 d N 3 Open Wire AE gn AIEN N 10 Leakage Resistor eros ED a g IN z sa Iz gz z9 N 13 Group 3 Cp ao 29 N 14 Group 3g N 15 AD 34 33 Not Used c Not Used DC COM Recommended Leakage Resistor Size 1 4 W 596 Supply Voltage 3 9K 10V DC 5 6K 12V DC 15K 24V DC 20K 30V DC Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 143 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 1B161 ControlLogix DC 10 30V isolated input module
111. All other channels with a NUT of that group will continue to operate as directed by the module master CPU bridge and so forth A fuse is provided on each common of this module for a total of two fuses The fuses are designed to protect the module from short circuit conditions The fuse does not provide overload protection In the event of an overload on an output channel it is likely that the fuse will not blow and the output device associated with that channel will be damaged To provide overload protection for your application user supplied fuses should be externally installed If a short circuit condition occurs on any channel within this module s group the entire group is turned Off The module does not provide protection against reverse polarity wiring or wiring to AC power sources The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has been reached Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19 2V DC The output channels that are affected by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module master CPU bridge and so forth What this means is that the ou
112. Backplane v Open Wire kkk kikkaa ka T0033 XIXIIRL LLLI MN V Iv d v d v 2 v Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 68 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 2 Do one of the following in the Enable Diag Latching column e To enable diagnostic latching for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable diagnostic latching for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by using these methods e Reset Diagnostic Latch service e Software reset during online monitoring e Cycling power to the module s Follow these steps to a reset a latched fault through RSLogix 5000 software during online monitoring 1 On the Modules Properties screen click the Diagnostics tab lil Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Reset Latched Diagnostics Status Running 2 Click Reset next to the point for which to reset a latched fault 3 Click OK Diagnostic Timestamp Diagnostic I O modules can timestamp the time when a fault occurs or when it clears This feature provides greater accuracy and flexibility in running applications Modules use the ControlLogix system clock from a l
113. C3 Power Up Hand H E Tasks Monitor Tags H E Motion Groups Edit Tags N The Controller Tags dialog box appears with data Aaziuebao 4a jou3u07 2 Expand the slot number of the module for which to view information See Appendix B for details on viewing and changing a module s configuration tags 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 Cat No Page Cat No Page 1756 IA8D 139 1756 0A161 157 1756 1A16 139 1756 0B8 158 1756 IA16l 140 1756 OB8EI 159 1756 1432 141 1756 0B8l 160 1756 IB16 142 1756 0B16D 161 1756 IB16D 143 1756 0B16E 162 1756 IB161 144 1756 0B16l 163 1756 IB16IF 145 1756 0B16lEF 164 1756 1832 146 1756 0B16IEFS 165 1756 IC16 147 1756 0B161S 166 1756 1816 148 1756 0B32 167 1756 IH16l 149 1756 0C8 168 1756 IM16l 150 1756 0616 169 1756 IN16 150 1756 0H81 170 1756 IV16 151 1756 0N8 171 1756 IV32 152 1756 0V16E 172 1756 048 153 1756 0V32E 173 1756 0A8D 154 1756 0W16l 174 1756 0A8E 155 1756 0X8l 175 1756 0416 156 This chapter provides wiring diagrams for all ControlLogix digital modules The table describes the different types of digital I O modules Digital 1 0 Type Diagnostic Description These modules provide diagnostic features to the point level These modules have a D at the end of the catalog number Electronic fusing
114. D Connection Data were last updated in CIP Sync format Output Data Data or Connection Listen Only Output Data None GrandMasterClocklD DINT Grandmaster Clock ID Indicates the ID of the CIP Sync Grandmaster to which the Connection Data module is synced Output Data Data or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Timestamp DINT Timestamp A 64 bit CIP Sync timestamp of the last new output data or FuseBlown Connection Data event Table 54 1756 0B16IEFS Module Output Data Tags Scheduled per Point Output Output Data Data or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition Type Data BOOL Data lIndicates the On Off state to apply to a nonscheduled output point Connection Data 0 Off Output Data Scheduled per 1 0n Point ScheduleMask BOOL Schedule Mask A mask indicating which output points are scheduled Connection Data 0 The output point is unscheduled The On Off state is determined by the value in the Output Data Scheduled per Data output tag Point 1 The output point is scheduled The On Off state is determined by the Schedule x Data output tag ResetFuseBlown BOOL Reset Blown Fuse Attempts to clear a blown fuse status and apply output data when Connection Data the bit transitions from Off to On Output Data Scheduled per Point TimestampOffset DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates the difference between th
115. Data Tags of eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to indicate the time that data changed see 8 bytes COSOffOnEn COSOnOffEn COSStatus DiagCOSDisable and or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred see OpenWireEn Field PwrLossEn Data DINT Off 0n Status for each input point 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 0n Fault DINT Fault Status An an ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and input data for that point may be 1 bit per point incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost then all points for the module will be faulted 0 No fault 1 Fault OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault Table 35 Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags Name Data Type Definition COSOnOffEn DINT Change of State On to Off Triggers an event in the controller for On to Off transition of input point and causes the 1bit per point input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated 0 Disable 1 Enable COS OffOnEn DINT Change of State Off to On Triggers an event in the controller for Off to On transition of input point and causes the 1 bit per point input module to update the data ta
116. Electronically fused 1756 08160 8 1756 0816E 2 3 6 Yes Fused on a per group basis 1756 08161 9 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p n 4A Quick acting MQ2 4A 1756 0B161EF2 G 6 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1756 0B16IEFs 2 6 1756 0B161S 8 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p n 4A Quick acting MQ2 4A 1756 0832 9 5x20mm Littelfuse p n 800mA SP001 1003 or Schurter p n 216 800 1756 0cg 9 5x20mm SOC p n 1756 06160 4A Quick acting MQ2 4A 1756 0HgI 9 1756 0V16E2 6 Yes Fused on a per group basis Electronically fused 1756 OV32E 3 6 Relay 1756 0W161 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p n 1756 0xg 9 6 3A Medium lag MT 4 6 3A 2 3 58 For voltages above 132V AC the Interface Modules IFM are not an acceptable means to provide external fusing A rated terminal block for the intended application must be used Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses circuit breakers or other code required wiring protection devices The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has been reached
117. Forever MI Forever wj Forever Nj Forever Mj Forever Mj Forever Mi Forever v Forever wi Forever v Foeever Nj Forever wifecever wjow F xj xl x x xi x x x x x x xj x x Coeeunicotions Fahre f bons falin Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode OC Charge outputs to Fit Mode state 2 Complete the fields as described in the table below and click OK Field Description 1756 0B161EF 1756 0B161EFS Configuration Tag Configuration Tag Fault Mode Output State Choose the length of time you want the output to remain in Fault mode state Pt x FaultValueStateDuration FaultValueStateDuration Duration before transitioning to the final state e 1second e 2seconds e 5seconds e 10 seconds e Forever default IMPORTANT If you choose Forever the output will remain in the Fault mode state until a connection is reestablished For example if the Fault mode is Hold and you specify a duration of Forever then the output retains its Hold state and does not transition to a Final state if a fault occurs Fault Mode Output State Choose whether you want the module to transition to an On or Off state after the Pt x FaultFinalState FaultFinalState Final State Fault mode duration time elapses The default final state is Off If you chose Forever you cannot choose a final state The module will retain its current Fault mode state 96 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012
118. Info Configuration Diagnostics Pulse Test Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI poo ms 0 2 750 0 ms Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 1580116 Electronic Keying Mismatch Major and or Minor revision invalid or incorrect Status Faulted Cancel Apply e Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 181 AppendixA Troubleshoot Your Module Notes 182 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Standard and Diagnostic Input Module Tags Tag Definitions Appendix B Topic Page Standard and Diagnostic Input Module Tags 183 Standard and Diagnostic Output Module Tags 186 Fast Input Module Tags 189 Fast Output Module Tags 194 Array Data Structures 211 This appendix describes the tags that are used for standard diagnostic and fast input and output modules Module defined data types and tags are created when a module is initiated The set of tags associated with any module depends on the type of module and the communication or connection format chosen during configuration ControlLogix standard and diagnostic input modules have two types of tags e Configuration Structure of data sent from the controller to the I O module upon powerup e Input Structure of data continually sent from the I O module to the controller containing the current operational sta
119. Input modules trigger the event task based on the modules COS configuration The COS configuration defines which points prompt the module to produce data if they turn On or Off This production of data triggers the event task e Typically enable COS for only one point on the module If you enable COS for multiple points a task overlap of the event task may occur For more information on event tasks refer to the Logix5000 Controllers Tasks Programs and Routines Programming Manual publication 1756 PM005 If an input module physically resides in a chassis other than where the owner controller resides the role of the RPI and the module s COS behavior changes slightly with respect to getting data to the owner The RPI and COS behavior still define when the module will multicast data within its own chassis as described in the previous section But only the value of the RPI determines when the owner controller will receive it over the network Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 8 8 ROLLS Local Chassis Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 Remote Input Modules Connected via the ControlNet Network When an RPI value is specified for an input module in a remote chassis connected by a scheduled ControlNet network in addition to instructing the module to multicast data within its own chassis the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet net
120. N O OUT 2 N C OUT 2 N O OUT 3 N C OUT 3 N O OUT 4 N C OUT 4 N O OUT 5 N C OUT 5 N O OUT 6 N C OUT 6 N O OUT 7 N C OUT 7 N O Not Used Not Used Chapter 8 o L2 0 o DC2 175 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams Notes 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Status Indicators for Input Modules Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module Topic Page Status Indicators for Input Modules 177 Status Indicators for Output Modules 178 Use RSLogix 5000 Software for Troubleshooting 180 This appendix describes the status indicators on the ControlLogix digital modules and how to use them to troubleshoot the module Each I O module has status indicators located on the front of the module ControlLogix input modules support the status indicators described in Table 31 below The available status indicators vary by module catalog number as shown in Figure 21 on page 178 Table 31 Status Indicators for Input Modules Indicator Status Description OK Status Steady green The inputs are being multicast and in a normal operating state Flashing green The module has passed internal diagnostics but is not multicasting inputs or is inhibited Uninhibit the connection or establish a connection to enable communication to the module Steady red The module must be replaced Flashing red Previously established communication has timed out Check the controller and chass
121. November 2012 253 fault latch 61 type 181 fault reporting diagnostic input modules 79 modules 70 output modules 81 fast input modules 106 output modules 107 standard input modules 64 modules 39 output modules 65 features common 37 66 diagnostic 67 82 digital 1 0 modules 138 fast 83 107 field power loss detection 1756 OA8E module 60 74 field power loss word diagnostic input modules 80 output modules 82 standard output modules 66 flat data structure 211 Full Diagnostic Input Data communication format 132 Full Diagnostics communication format 133 fuse blown word diagnostic output modules 82 107 standard output modules 66 fusing electronic 57 housing options 120 IFM See interface module Input Data communication format 132 install 1 0 module assemble RTB 119 connect wires 114 extended depth housing 120 insert into chassis 112 install RTB 122 key RTB 113 interface module 14 internal module operation 21 K keying electronic 40 mechanical 16 Removable Terminal Block RTB 113 latch fault 61 pulse 86 timestamps 89 Listen Only communication format 34 132 133 local chassis input modules 27 output modules 31 locking tab 16 Logix Designer application 11 loss of field power 56 M major revision 128 mechanical fusing 57 keying 16 minor revision 128 module 1756 1A16 139 1756 1A161 140 1756 1432 141 1756 IA8D 139 1756 IB16 142 1756 IB16D 143 1756 IB16l 144 1756 IB16IF 145 1756 IB32 146
122. Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x 0rToPeerWindow0 SINT Peer Data with OR Logic Determines the output state by applying OR logic to these Connection Peer Ownership sources Output Data Data with Peer e Corresponding bits from window 0 of the peer counter module I Counter x InputWindow0 e Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x AndToPeerWindow1 SINT Peer Data with AND Logic Determines the output state by applying AND logic to Connection Peer Ownership these sources Output Data Data with Peer e Corresponding bits from window 1 of the peer counter module I Counter x InputWindow1 Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration OutputMap x OrToPeerWindow1 SINT Peer Data with OR Logic Determines the output state by applying OR logic to these Connection Peer Ownership sources e Corresponding bits from window 1 of the peer counter module Counter x InputWindow1 e Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Data with Peer 197 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 48 1756 0B16IEF Module Input Data Tags Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Fault DINT Fault Status lIndicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the output Connection Data module is lost then all 32 bits of the Module Fault word are set
123. Pt x OverridePeerWindow1En BOOL Override Peer Window 1 Overrides peer window 1 inputs mapped to the output point Connection Peer Ownership with the value defined in the Pt x OverridePeerWindow Value output tag Output Data Data with Peer 0 Disable 1 Enable Pt x OverridePeerWindow1Value BOOL Override Peer Window 1 Value Indicates the On Off status to apply to peer window 1 Connection Peer Ownership inputs mapped to the output point when the corresponding bit in the Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverridePeerWindow1En output tag is enabled 0 Off 1 0n Pt x PWMCycleTime REAL PWM Cycle Time Defines the duration of each pulse cycle Requires PWM to be enabled Connection Data via the Pt x PWMEnable configuration tag Valid values 0 001 3600 0 seconds Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer 201 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 49 1756 0B16IEF Module Output Data Tags continued Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition Type Pt x PWMOnTime REAL PWM 0n Time Defines the length of time that a pulse is active Requires PWM to be Connection Data enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable configuration tag Output Data Data or Scheduled Valid values per Module 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or or Connection Peer Ownership 0 100 0 percent Output Data Data with Peer
124. Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers 106 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 107 Fast digital I O modules provide quick response time for high speed control applications The table lists the available fast digital I O modules Cat No Description 1756 IB16IF 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast peer control input module 1756 0B16lEF 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast peer control output module 1756 OB161EFS 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast scheduled per point output module Fast Input Module When designing systems with ControlLogix fast input modules consider these factors Compatibility e Voltage necessary for your application e Sensor performance and specifications e Whether your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 83 Chapter5 Fast Module Features Fast Output Module Compatibility Fast Features 84 ControlLogix fast output modules can be used to drive a variety of output devices Typical output devices compatible with ControlLogix outputs include these items e Solenoids e Indicators Follow these guidelines when designing a system e Make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation e Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads refe
125. TANT The depth from the front of the module to the back of the chassis is as follows e Standard depth housing 147 91 mm 5 823 in e Extended depth housing 157 43 mm 6 198 in Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 121 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Install the Removable Terminal Block 122 This section shows how to install the RTB onto the module to connect the wiring A A WARNING When you connect or disconnect the Removable Terminal Block RTB with field side power applied an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding ATTENTION Shock hazard exists If the RTB is installed onto the module while the field side power is applied the RTB will be electrically live Do not touch the RTB5 terminals Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature It is recommended that field side power be removed before installing the RTB onto the module Before installing the RTB make certain of the following e Field side wiring of the RTB has been completed e RTB housing is snapped into place on the
126. These modules have internal electronic fusing to prevent too much current from flowing through the module These modules have an E at the end of the catalog number Individually isolated These modules have individually isolated inputs or outputs These modules have an at the end of the catalog number Fast These modules provide fast response times These modules have an F at the end of the catalog number Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 137 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams Table 30 1756 1 0 Module Features Module Type 1756 digital AC input modules The 1756 digital I O modules support these features Features Change of state Software configurable Timestamp of inputs 200 ps Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical 1756 digital AC output modules Scheduled outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Fault states per point Hold last state on or off off is default States in Program mode per point Hold last state on or off off is default Fusing 1756 0A8D 1756 OA8E Electronically fused per point 1756 0A16 Mechanically fused group 3 15 A 250V AC slow blow 1500 A interruption current Littelfuse p n H2153 15 All other modules Not protected A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs see publication 1492 TD008 Module keying Electronic software
127. Time Total On Off delay screw to backplane 14 us nom 23 yis max user configurable filter time Hardware delay lt 1 ys nom 2 us max Firmware delay 13 us nom 21 us max User configurable filter time 0 30 000 ps Table 17 Output Response Time Delay Response Time Total On Off delay screw to backplane 14 us nom 23 us max Hardware delay lt 1 ys nom 2 us max Firmware delay 13 us nom 21 us max The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix fast digital input modules Topic Page Pulse Capture 86 Per Point Timestamping and Change of State 87 Software Configurable Filter Times 90 Dedicated Connection for Event Tasks 93 IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 software version 18 02 00 and 19 01 00 output tag information is sent to the 1756 IB16IF module only at the RPI rate defined during configuration For optimal performance use an Immediate Output IOT instruction For example the rung shown below contains an IOT instruction for a fast input module in slot 3 Add a similar rung to your last routine within the Main Task to mimic normal output tag processing OT Immediate Output Update Tag Local 3 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 85 Chapter 5 86 Fast Module Features Pulse Capture The 1756 IB16IF fast input module can be used to detect or latch short duration pulses The module can detect incoming pulses with a duration as short as 10 us if the fr
128. UM058G EN P November 2012 13 Chapter1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 1 0 Modules in the ControlLogix modules mount in a ControlLogix chassis and require either a e removable terminal bloc or a Bulletin wiring interface module ControlLogix System bl l block RTB Bull 1492 g f dul IEM to connect all field side wiring Before you install and use your module you must do the following e Install and ground a 1756 chassis and power supply To install these products refer to the publications listed in Additional Resources on page 12 e Order and receive an RTB or IFM and its components for your application IMPORTANT RIBsand IFMs are not included with your module purchase See page 116 for RTBs and page 239 for IFMs Table 1 ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Cat No Description Page 1756 IA8D 79 132V AC8 point diagnostic input module 139 1756 1A16 74 132V AC 16 point input module 139 1756 IA161 79 132V AC 16 point isolated input module 140 1756 1432 74 132V AC 32 point input module 11 1756 IB16 10 31 2V DC 16 point input module 142 1756 IB16D 10 30V DC diagnostic input module 143 1756 1B161 10 30V DC 16 point isolated input module 144 1756 IB16IF 10 30V DC 16 point isolated fast peer control input module 145 1756 IB32 10 31 2V DC 32 point input module 146 1756 IC16 30 60V DC 16 point input module 147 1756
129. User Manual Allen Bradley ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Catalog Numbers 1756 IA8D 1756 1A16 1756 1A161 1756 132 1756 1816 1756 IB16D 1756 IB16l 1756 IB16IF 1756 1B32 1756 1 16 1756 1616 1756 1H161 1756 IM16l 1756 IN16 1756 1V16 1756 1V32 1756 0A8 1756 OA8D 1756 OA8E 756 0A16 1756 0A161 1756 0B8 1756 OB8EI 1756 OB8I 1756 0B16D 1756 OB16E 1756 0B161 1756 OB16lEF 1756 OB16lEFS 1756 0B1615 1756 0B32 1756 0C8 1756 0616 1756 0H8l 1756 ON8 1756 0V16E 1756 0V32E 1756 OW 161 1756 0X81 ak beet BEER ER babel it x 2 i Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
130. a wr n n m n m n m n oO A T OUT 0 OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 1 0UT2 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 3 0UT4 OUT 4 OUT5 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 6 QUT7 OUT 7 Not Used Not Used Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1756 0B16D ControlLogix DC 19 2 30V diagnostic output module Simplified schematic DC Short Circuit l C 5V 5V Detect o xD pokolatin k s Vue Sil T ve j p z OUT ControlLogix x C 23 Backplane de RN Interface Display Output Verify No Load COD Surge Current Chart AA Surge E Continuous 30 C 86 F nl 30 C 86 F 3 Continuous 60 C 140 F 0 10 ms Time Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Group 0 Group 1 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 ND 0 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 ND 1 ND 1 Used Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 0B16D M A n Oak Wiring Diagrams OL noo qn qc c do X c i d m oS ooo C CO Q3 CO CO CO oo Q0 QOO 2 amp 2 c9 c 9 e mj ag ab Chapter 8 Group 0 161 Ch
131. a Data with Peer 1 2 5 or 10 seconds p E Pt x PWMCycleLimit SINT PWM Cycle Limit Defines the number of pulse cycles to occur when the output turns Connection Data On Output Data Data or Scheduled e Ifthe corresponding bit in the Pt x PWMExecuteAllCycles tag is set the configured per Module number of cycles will occur even if the output turns Off or e Ifthe corresponding bit in the Pt x PWMExecuteAllCydes tag is cleared the configured Connection Peer Ownership number of cycles will occur only if the output remains On For example ifthe cycle limit Output Data Data with Peer is 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles the 4th cycle will not occur The default cycle limit is 10 Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag and cycle limits to be enabled via the Pt x PWMCycleLimitEnable tag 196 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Table 47 1756 0B16IEF Module Configuration Tags continued Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Pt x PWMMinimumOnTime REAL PWM Minimum On Time Defines the minimum length of time required for the output Connection Data to turn On Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag Output Data Data or Scheduled Valid values per Module 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or or Connection Peer Ownership 0 100 percent Output Data Data with Peer OutputMap x AndToControllerData
132. active for 4 5 seconds Output State Each pulse is active for 0 5 seconds On time l lt gt 1 Second Cycle Time By default PWM is configured to continue the output pulse train until the output logic turns Off When the output logic turns Off the output pulse train immediately stops EXAMPLE In Figure 14 the output logic is On for 4 25 seconds and then turns Off in the middle of the last pulse Even though the PWM On time is configured for 0 5 Seconds the last pulse is only active for 0 25 seconds because it is truncated when the output logic turns Off Figure 14 PWM with Truncated Pulse Output Logic Output logic is On for 4 25 seconds Output State The last pulse is truncated when the output logic turns Off 98 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 IMPORTANT TheProgram and Fault mode states configured for the module override the PWM output state unless the point is configured to hold the last state while in Program or Fault mode If a point is configured to hold the last state and the output is currently On the output will continue to use PWM until the PWM cycle limit is reached the module transitions out of Program or Fault mode or a final fault state goes into effect For more information see the following e Configurable Point level Output States on page 55 e Programmable Fault State Delays on page 95 e Cycle Limit and Execute All Cycles on p
133. ad detection 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8D 3 1 Enable Diag Latching z Vv 5 r r r r Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv NISI XI XI XI XI SI SI NISI SI SI SI XI SI SI r Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the No Load column e To enable the feature for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable the feature for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix B Field side Output Verification Field side output verification informs you that logic side instructions consumed by the module are accurately represented on the power side of a switching device For each output point this feature confirms that the output is On when it is commanded to be On The diagnostic output module can tell a controller that it received a command and whether the field side device connected to the module has executed the command For example in applications that need to verify that the module has accurately followed the processor s instructions the module samples the field side sta
134. age 99 You can modify the default PWM configuration for each of a module s 16 outputs for further control of an output s pulse train as described in PWM Configuration on page 103 Configuration options include the following e Cycle Limit and Execute All Cycles as described below e Minimum On Time Extend Cycle and Stagger Output as described on page 100 Cyce Limit and Execute All Cycles You can limit the number of pulse cycles that occur while an output is On This feature is useful when you want to apply a level of output control when a process is stopped For example in a gluing application you may want to apply 4 drops of glue to a product when the product is within a fixed window on a conveyor belt By configuring a cycle limit of 4 you can make sure that only 4 drops of glue are applied even ifthe conveyor belt stops with the product in the window Controlling the process with the Cycle Limit feature eliminates the need to write complex logic to detect a stopped conveyor belt Figure 15 shows a PWM pulse train configured with a cycle limit of 2 The PWMCycleLimitDone input tag indicates when the PWM cycle limit has been reached The corresponding bit is reset upon the next rising edge of the output which restarts PWM Figure 15 PWM Cycle Limit Output Logic Output State Only 2 cycles are executed even The cycle limit restarts when the output begins pulsing though the output logic remains On on the next rising
135. age Type Jar Generic zl Message Type CIP Generic z Service Reset Electronic Fuse Source Element i Type Service Code faa Hex Source 5lot4_Ch0_Reset_Fuse d Source Length 7 2 Bytes Object Type fie Hex Num Of Elements 1 3 Bytes peyiee 4d Hex Class fe Hex Destination Object ID fi Destination Local 4 C Instance 1 Attribute o Hex nese Object Attribute Hex Create Tag O Enable Enable Waiting 2 Start O Done Done Length 0 O Eror Code I Timed Dut O Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 0 Error Code Extended Error Code Timed Out Error Path Extended Error Code Error Text o ce am ne Sen fem The following table explains the relationship of the fields in the above dialog boxes For example despite different entry fields both screen examples are configured to send a message to reset an electronic fuse module service on Channel 0 of a 1756 OA8D module where to perform the service Table 56 Relationship of Message Configuration Parameters RSLogix 5000 Version 9 00 00 or RSLogix 5000 Version 10 07 00 or Description Earlier Later Service Code Service Type Defines the type of module service to be performed For example a reset Note In version 10 07 00 or later you can use a pull down menu to choose the Service Type The software defaults the Service Code Instance Class and Attribute parameters based
136. allations Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Input Modules ina Local Chassis 0S Multicast RPI Multicast 250 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 When a module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller the following two configuration parameters affect how and when an input module multicasts data e Requested packet interval RPI e Change of state COS RPI The RPI defines the slowest rate at which a module multicasts its data to the owner controller The time ranges from 200 us 750 ms and is sent to the module with all other configuration parameters When the specified time frame elapses the module will multicast data This is also called a cyclic update cos COS instructs the module to transfer data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off or Off to On The transition is referred to as a change of state IMPORTANT The module s COS feature defaults to Enabled for both On to Off and Off to On COS configuration occurs on a per point basis but all module data is multicast when any point enabled for COS changes state COS is more efficient than RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs IMPORTANT You must specify an RPI regardless of whether you enable COS If a change does not occur within the RPI timeframe the module still will multicast data at the rate specified by the RPI For example if an input is chan
137. an specify one of several Listen modes For more information see Communication or Connection Formats on page 131 Choosing a Listen mode allows the controller and module to establish communication without the controller sending any configuration data In this instance another controller owns the module being listened to IMPORTANT _InListen only mode controllers continue to receive data multicast from the 1 0 module as long as the connection between the owner controller and 1 0 module is maintained If the connection between the owner controller and module is broken the module stops multicasting data and connections to all listening controllers are also broken Ifa connection is lost between an owner controller and a module the connection is also lost between any controllers listening to that module As a result the ControlLogix system lets you define more than one owner controller for input modules IMPORTANT Only input modules can have multiple owner controllers If multiple owner controllers are connected to the same input module they must maintain identical configurations for that module In the illustration below controller A and controller B both have been configured to be owner controllers of the same input module Figure 6 Identical Owner Controller Configurations for Input Module Input Module Configuration Data XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX Input e 8 4 Initial Configuration
138. and 1756 OB161EF modules Added leakage resistor sizing and supply voltage chart for the 1756 IB16D module Added wiring diagrams for the 1756 IB16IF and 1756 0B161EF modules Added status indicator information for the 1756 IB16IF and 1756 OB16IEF modules Added new tags for the 1756 IB16IF and 1756 0B16IEF modules Added a section about timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs for fast 1 0 modules Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 249 AppendixH History of Changes 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 250 Change Added information for scheduling 1 0 modules on the ControlNet network and setting up 1 0 modules to trigger event based tasks Added features and module specific information for the 1756 1A32 module Added features and module specific information for the 1756 IG16 module Added features and module specific information for the 1756 OB8I module Added features and module specific information for the 1756 0B16IS module Added features and module specific information for the 1756 0G16 module Added features and module specific information for th e 1756 0V32E module Added a section about electronic keying with examples of Exact Match Compatible and Disabled Keying options Added new digital 1 0 specifications Added requirements for firmware updates for Major Revision 3 x Updated information on Interface Modules IFMs and prewired cables
139. apter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0B16E ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V electronically fused output module Simplified Schematic Display Optoisolation DC 0 4 Ka Lt z A t 1 e OUT 0 ControlLogix Electronic Fuse RTN Backplane Circuitry OUT 0 Interface Surge Current Chart 2 Surge Current Continuous 60 C 140 F 1A Time 162 10 ms Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Group 0 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Group 1 OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7 DC Ol OUT 9 OUT 11 OUT 13 OUT 15 DC 1 1756 OB16E OUT 2 Group 0 OUT 4 OUT 6 RTN OUT 0 UT 8 OUT 10 ui OUT 12 et SI Group 1 OUT 14 vol m S EX G3 C9 63 KD EB 5 ED EB D ey ey o CD 15 0 KD CD CD gm DC COM 1756 0B16l Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 ControlLogix DC 10 30V isolated output module Simplified Schematic 2 OUT 0 ControlLogix Backplane Interface Display Surge Current Chart 4A Surge Continuous 30 C 86 F Current N gt t Continuous 60 C 140 F 0 10 ms Time 2A Isolated
140. arters 375 x 12 4 5A 50 C 122 F The output total module current can drive 5A 033 mA x 10 x C 5A 0 33 A 4 67 A 50 C 122 F Above 30 C 86 F total output current derates to 033 mA x C Module derating The 1756 0A16I total output current 4 67A can drive the 12 motor starters 4 5 A 50 C 122 F Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Appendix F Major Revision Upgrades Topic Page If Using a Compatible or Disabled Keying 1 0 Configuration 238 If Using an Exact Match Keying Configuration 238 With the exception of fast digital I O modules catalog numbers 1756 IB16IF 1756 OB16IEF and 1756 OBIGIEFS ControlLogix 1756 digital I O modules are transitioning to use a new internal backplane Application Specific Integrated Circuits ASIC chip As a result the Major Revision number for these modules has also been upgraded Digital I O modules with the new ASIC have Major Revision 3 x IMPORTANT Donotbackflash your module s firmware from firmware revision 3 x to 2 x Attempting to backflash or downgrade a module s firmware from 3 x to 2 x will irreversibly damage the module You must return modules damaged by an attempt to backflash to firmware 2 x to Rockwell Automation Modules with the new internal backplane ASIC are form fit functional equivalents to the 2 x modules You can use Major Revision 3 x modules as direct replacements for Major Revision 2 x modules in th
141. atchEvents BOOL Latch Event When set latches an event until the event is acknowledged Once Connection Data with Event acknowledged the event is overridden by a new event Input Data Timestamp Data 0 Events are overridden by new events 1 Events are latched until acknowledged and new events are ignored Pt x NewDataOffOnAck BOOL Acknowledge Off to On Transition A rising edge acknowledges Off to On transitions Connection Data by clearing the corresponding bits in the Pt x Timestamp OffOn x and Input Data Data or Timestamp Data Pt x NewDataOffOn input tags or 0 Offto On transitions are not acknowledged Connection Data with Event 1 Off to On transitions are acknowledged on the initial tranisition to 1 of this bit Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x NewDataOnOffAck BOOL Acknowledge On to Off Transition A rising edge acknowledges On to Off transitions Connection Data by clearing the corresponding bits in the Pt x Timestamp OnOff x and Input Data Data or Timestamp Data Pt x NewDataOnOff input tags or 0 On to Off transitions are not acknowledged Connection Data with Event 1 On to Off transitions are acknowledged on the initial tranisition to 1 of this bit Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x DataOverrideEn BOOL Override Data When set simulates an input transition when in Run mode by Connection Data or Data with Event overriding the actual input state with the value defined in the Pt x DataOverrideVal
142. ble as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated 0 Disable 1 Enable DiagCOSDisable BOOL Diagnostic Change of State Triggers the module to transmit diagnostic status data with an updated timestamp as 1 bit per point soon as the diagnostic data changes state FaultLatchEn DINT Latch Fault lf enabled for a point any OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss stays latched in the faulted state even if the fault no 1 bit per point longer exists until you clear the fault 0 Disable 1 Enable latching FieldPwrLossEn DINT Field Power Loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable 184 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Tag Definitions Appendix B Table 35 Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags continued Name Data Type Definition FilterOnOff 0 7 SINT Filter Time On to Off fFilter time for digital filter in digital input modules for On to Off transition Operates on groups of 1 byte per group eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 9 18 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms FilterOffOn 0 7 SINT Filter Time Off to On Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for Off to On transition Operates on groups of 1 byte per group eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms OpenWireEn DINT Open Wire Enables Open Wire diagnostic 1 bit per point
143. ce A Time at which Input Changed 0 991817809 991817889 Source B LastTinestamp Source B 4000 991817889 Dest Tine at which Input Changed EQ 991827889 Not Equal Source A Time al which Input Changed 1 ioy 74 Move Source B LastTimestampl Source Time at which Input Changed 0 74 991817889 Dest LastTimestamp0 991817889 pL 390N Move Source Time at which Input Changed 1 T Dest LastTimestampt 74 The input point point 0 must have Change of State enabled or the timestamp will not update when the point transitions Once Change of State has been detected 10 ms is added to the input timestamp and sent to the output module s timestamp This causes the output module to apply its output exactly 10 ms 10 000 us after the input changed state The MOVe instructions update LastTimestamp in preparation for the next change of state IMPORTANT _ Timestamps are eight bytes in size two DINTS but only the lower four bytes of the output timestamp Time at which Ouput Will Change are used to schedule the outputs into the future to a max of 16 7 s or 16 700 000 s e Rung isthe standard XIC OTE rung that controls the output point based on the input point Local 6 10 Data 0 0 Local 6 00 Data 0 0 ee Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 223 Appendix C 224 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration The only difference is th
144. ce the cycle limit is reached a new cycle sequence will begin This field is only available when the Enable Cycle Limit checkbox is checked By default the Execute All Cycles checkbox is cleared 5 To copy the current configuration to one or more of the remaining output points so that multiple outputs share the same PWM behavior do the following a Click Copy PWM Configuration b On the Copy PWM Configuration dialog box check the points to which to apply the current configuration and click OK By default all points are checked Copy PWM Configuration Copy Point 0 PWM Configuration to selected points v Pome 1 pore 9 Eiro 2 Point 10 vivant 3 v Peit t1 VI Poi 4 v Pont 12 Por S 7 Point 13 v Pont 6 v Point 14 V Pot 7 7 Point 15 7 Powe s 6 On the PWM Configuration tab click OK to save the configuration for each output point you specified Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 105 Chapter5 Fast Module Features Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers Module Fault Word All Modules ControlLogix fast input modules multicast fault and status data to any owner controller or listening controller All input modules maintain a Module Fault word the highest level of fault reporting Modules configured to use the Data with Event connection format also maintain an Event Fault word to report on the status of an event connection Tab
145. ch The process of transferring the contents of a project on the workstation into the controller A feature where modules can be requested to perform an electronic check to make sure that the physical module is consistent with what was configured by the software An electronic keying protection mode that requires the physical module and the module configured in the software to match according to vendor catalog number major revision and minor revision Interface between user field wiring and I O module A ControlLogix process that lets you configure an I O module but prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the controller behaves as if the I O module does not exist at all A module that uses pre wired cable to connect wiring to an I O module An I O connection where another controller owns provides the configuration and data for the module A module revision that is updated any time there is a functional change to the module 251 Glossary minor revision multicast multiple owners network update time NUT owner controller program mode rack connection rack optimization remote connection removal and insertion under power RIUP removable terminal block RTB requested packet interval RPI run mode service system side tag timestamping 252 A module revision that is updated any time there is a change to the module that does not affect its function or interface
146. ch rung Table 60 Rung Values Rung Module ID Retrieved Description 1 Product Type Module product type 7 Digital 1 0 10 Analog 1 0 Catalog Code Module5 catalog number 2 Major Revision Module major revision Minor Revision Module s minor revision 3 Status Module status Multiple bits listed Bit 0 0 Unowned 1 Owned Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 0 Unconfigured 1 Configured Bit 3 Reserved Bits 7 4 Forms a 4 bit number indicating Device Specific Status 0 Self Test 1 Flash update in progress 2 Communications fault 3 Not owned outputs in Program mode 4 Unused 5 Internal fault need flash update 6 Run mode 7 Program mode output mods only Bit 8 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 9 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 10 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 11 0 No fault 1 Major unrecoverable fault Bits 15 12 Unused 4 Vendor ID Module manufacturer vendor 1 Allen Bradley Serial Number Module serial number 5 Length of ASCII Text String Number of characters in module s text string ASCII Text String Module ASCII text string description Review of Tags in Ladder Logic When you use tags in ladder logic applications remember these guidelines e Ladder logic tags represent the module on a point per bit basis For example point 0 bit 0 on the module e Ifyou are performing a service through the tags a value of 0 prevents th
147. configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical 1756 digital DC input modules Reverse polarity protection All modules except 1756 IG16 module Change of state Software configurable Timestamp of inputs 100 us for sequence of events modules 200 us for all other modules Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical 1756 digital DC output modules Scheduled outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Fault states per point Hold last state on or off off is default States in Program mode per point Hold last state on or off off is default Fusing 1756 0B8EI 1756 0B16D 1756 0B16E 1756 OB16lEF 1756 OB16lEFS 1756 0V16E 1756 0V32E Electronically fused per point All other modules not protected A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical 1756 digital contact modules 1 For details see the ControlLogix Sequence of Events Module Instal 138 Scheduled outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Configurable fault states per point Hold last state on or off off is default Configurable states in Program mode per point Hold last state on or off off is default Fusing Not protected A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See
148. connections 32 rack connection 24 optimization 24 26 P peer ownership 84 point level fault reporting 70 Index prevent electrostatic discharge 111 producer consumer model 13 31 pulse capture 86 latch 86 test 78 pulse width modulation configure 103 cycle limit 99 cycle time 97 execute all cycles 99 extend cycle 100 minimum On time 100 On time 97 stagger output 100 Rack Optimization communication format 132 133 rack optimized connection 23 24 26 remote chassis input modules 28 output modules 32 removable terminal block 14 assemble 119 install 122 key 113 parts illustration 16 remove 123 types 116 wire 114 Removal and Insertion Under Power 13 39 111 122 123 remove 1 0 module 125 removable terminal block 123 requested packet interval 27 79 RIUP See Removal and Insertion Under Power RPI See requested packet interval RSLogix 5000 software configure 1 0 modules 20 40 use with RSNetWorx software 20 RSNetWorx software transfer configuration data 20 use with RSLogix 5000 software 20 RTB See removable terminal block S scheduled output data fast 1 0 modules 48 133 224 standard and diagnostic modules 47 222 Scheduled Output Data communication format 133 specifications 12 spring clamp RTB 117 status indicators 16 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 255 Index status reporting diagnostic input modules 79 output modules 81 fas
149. ctions Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Fault DINT Fault Status Indicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the output Connection Data module is lost then all 32 bits of the Fault word are set Output Data Data 0 No fault or 1 Fault Connection Listen Only Output Data None Pt x Data BOOL Data lIndicates the current value to be sent to the corresponding output point IfPWMis Connection Data enabled this value will transition from 0 to 1 based on the PWM pulse train Output Data Data 0 Off or 1 0n Connection Listen Only Output Data None Pt x Fault BOOL Fault Status lIndicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the output Connection Data module is lost then all 32 bits of the Fault word are set Output Data Data 0 No fault or 1 Fault Connection Listen Only Output Data None Pt x FuseBlown BOOL Fuse Is Blown Indicates whether a fuse has blown due to a short or overload condition Connection Data for the corresponding point All blown fuse conditions are latched and must be reset Output Data Data 0 Fuse is not blown or 1 Fuse is blown and has not been reset Connection Listen Only Output Data None Pt x PWMCycleLimitDone BOOL PWM Cycle Limit Done Indicates whether the PWM pulse cycle limit defined in the Connection Data Pt x PWMCycleLimit configuration tag has been reached Output Data Data 0 The PWM cycle limit has n
150. d four terminals per input 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F FS240A 4 Fusible Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input 1756 IN16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20F F24A 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for inputs 1756 IV16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 242 1492 IFM20F 2 1492 IFM20F 3 Extra terminals 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 1492 IFM20D24N 1492 IFM20D24A 2 1492 IFM20D24 3 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appe
151. d to a single owner controller For more information about using multiple owner controllers see Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners on page 35 The I O configuration within RSLogix 5000 software generates the configuration data for each I O module in the control system including modules in a remote chassis A remote chassis contains the I O module but not the module s owner controller A remote chassis can be connected to the controller via an EtherNet IP network or a scheduled connection on the ControlNet network Configuration data from RSLogix 5000 software is transferred to the controller during the program download and subsequently transferred to I O modules The I O modules in the local or remote chassis are ready to run as soon as the configuration data has been downloaded However to enable scheduled connections to I O modules on the ControlNet network you must schedule the network by using RSNetWorx for ControlNet software RSNetWorx software transfers configuration data to I O modules on a scheduled ControlNet network and establishes a network update time NUT for the ControlNet network that is compliant with the desired communication options specified for each module during configuration Anytime a controller references a scheduled connection to I O modules on a scheduled ControlNet network you must run RSNetWorx software to configure the ControlNet network Rockwell Automation Publication
152. der Power 39 Module Fault Reporting 39 Software Configurable 40 Electronic Keying 40 Module Inhibiting 46 Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs 47 Producer Consumer Communication 50 Status Indicator Information 50 Removal and Insertion Under Power All ControlLogix I O modules may be inserted and removed from the chassis while power is applied This feature allows greater availability of the overall control system While the module is being removed or inserted there is no additional disruption to the rest of the control process This helps prevent an entire production line from having to be shut down Module Fault Reporting ControlLogix digital I O modules provide both hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred Each module s fault status indicator and RSLogix 5000 software will graphically display this fault and include a fault message describing the nature of the fault This feature lets you determine how your module has been affected and what action should be taken to resume normal operation The 1756 OBI1GIEF module extends this feature by enabling you to define the duration of time before the module transitions to On or Off after a fault occurs For more information see Programmable Fault State Delays on page 95 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 39 Chapter 3 40 Common Module Features Software Configurable RSLogix 5000 software provi
153. des an interface to configure each module All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O configuration within the software You can also use the software to retrieve the following information from any module in the system e Serial number e Firmware revision information e Product code e Vendor e Error and fault information e Diagnostic counters By eliminating tasks such as setting hardware switches and jumpers the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable Electronic Keying The electronic keying feature automatically compares the expected module as exists in the RSLogix 5000 I O Configuration tree to the physical module in the chassis before I O communication begins You can use electronic keying to help prevent communication to a module that does not match the type and revision expected For each module in the I O Configuration tree the user selected keying option determines if and how an electronic keying check is performed Typically three keying options are available e Exact Match e Compatible Keying e Disable Keying You must carefully consider the benefits and implications of each keying option when selecting between them For some specific module types fewer options are available Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Electronic keying is based on a set of attributes unique to each product revision When a Logix50
154. dicates when an output is not performing as commanded by the owner controller For more information see Field side Output Verification on page 76 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OB8 module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because the module is an 8 point module only the first 8 bits 0 7 are used in the module fault word Fault bits in the fuse blown word field power loss word no load word and output verify word are logically entered into the module fault word Depending on the module type a bit set in the module fault word can mean multiple things as indicated in the table Table 15 Bits Set in Module fault Word Condition Bits Set Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Fuse blown Field power loss No load Only the bit affected is set to 1 Output verify Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 81 Chapter4 Diagnostic Module Features Module fault Word Fuse Blown Word Field power Loss Word 1756 0A8D only No Load Word Output Verify Word 82 The following illustration provides an overview of the fault reporting process for digital output modules
155. dow 0 is not enabled 1 The override feature for peer window 0 is enabled Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Data with Peer 199 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 48 1756 0B16IEF Module Input Data Tags continued Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Pt x PeerWindow10verrideStatus BOOL Peer Window 1 Override Status Indicates whether peer window 1 data mappedto Connection Peer Ownership the corresponding output point is set up to be overridden by the value in the Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverridePeerWindow1Value output tag Requires the 0 Pt x 0verridePeerWindow1En output tag to be enabled 0 The override feature for peer window 1 is not enabled 1 The override feature for peer window 1 is enabled LocalClockOffset DINT Local Clock Timestamp Indicates the offset between the current CST and the CIP Sync Connection Data value when a valid CIP Sync time is available Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer OffsetTimestamp DINT Timestamp Offset tndicates when the CIP Sync LocalClockOffset and GrandMasterlD Connection Data were last updated in CIP Sync format Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer GrandMasterCl
156. dule s configuration data in a multiple owner scenario If the configuration data is changed in owner A and sent to the module that configuration data is accepted as the new configuration for the module Owner B will continue to listen unaware that any changes have been made in the module s behavior as illustrated below Figure 7 Module Configuration Changes with Multiple Owners Input Module Configuration Data XXXXX 22222 XXXXX A Input e B hitial Configuration c Eu To Input Module Configuration Data XXXXX A B B XXXXX 9 XXXXX a 9 41057 IMPORTANT A message in RSLogix 5000 software alerts you to the possibility of a multiple owner controller situation and lets you inhibit the connection before changing the module s configuration When changing the configuration for a module with multiple owners we recommend the connection be inhibited Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 35 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System To prevent other owner controllers from receiving potentially erroneous data use these steps when changing a module s configuration in a multiple owner scenario while online 1 For each owner controller inhibit the connection to the module either in th
157. e 0 Use FaultValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State FaultValue DINT Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs 1 bit per point See FaultMode 0 Off 1 0n FieldPwrLoss DINT Field Power Loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable oLoadEn DINT No Load Enables No Load diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable OutputVerifyEn DINT Output Verify Enables Output Verify diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 187 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 40 Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags continued Name Data Type Definition ProgMode DINT Program Mode Used in conjnunction with ProgValue to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in 1 bit per point Program mode See ProgValue 0 Use ProgValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State ProgValue DINT Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program 1 bit per point mode See ProgMode 0 0ff 1 0n ProgloFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transition of outputs to FaultMode if a communication failure 1 byte per module occurs in Program mode Otherwise outputs will remain in Program mode See ProgMode ProgValue FaultMode FaultValue 0 Outputs stay in Program
158. e action from occurring and a value of 1 causes the action to occur For example if you want to reset the electronic fuse on a particular bit enter 1 in the tags e Ifyou are checking the response of a service through the tags a value of 0 means the bit passed the service and a value of 1 means the bit failed the service For example if you perform a pulse test and the response displays a 0 for a particular bit the bit passed the test Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 231 AppendixC Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Notes 232 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Choose a Correct Power Supply Appendix D Use the chart to determine the power your ControlLogix chassis is using to prevent an inadequate power supply We recommend that you use this worksheet to check the power supply of each ControlLogix chassis used Slot Module Current Power Current Power Current Power Number Cat No 5 1V DC mA 5 1V DC Watts 24V DC mA 24V DC Watts 3 3V DC mA 3 3V DC Watts 0 X5 1V x24V X33V 1 X5 1V x24V X33V 2 X5 1V x24V X33V 3 X5 1V x24V X33V 4 X5 1V x24V X33V 5 X5 1V x24V X33V 6 X5 1V x24V X33V 7 X5 1V x 24V X33V 8 X5 1V xX 24V X33V 9 X5 1V xX24V X33V 10 x5 1V x24V x33V 11 x5 1V x24V x33V 12 x5 1V x24V x33V
159. e instruction as described on page 227 Follow these steps to reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix5000 software during online monitoring 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Diagnostics tab The fields on the Diagnostic tab vary depending on whether your module supports fusing on a per point basis or a per group basis Fusing on a per group basis E Module Properties Local 4 1756 OB16E 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Reset Fuse for Points 0 7 Reset Fuse for Points 8 15 Status Running Apply Fusing on a per point basis E Module Properties Local 7 1756 0B16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuratio ulse Test Backplane Reset Latched Diagnostics Status Running Apply 2 Click Reset for the output points for which to reset a fuse 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 59 Chapter 3 60 Common Module Features Field Power Loss Detection For the standard digital output modules the Field Power Loss detection feature is found on the 1756 OA8E module only When field power to the module is lost or zero cross cannot be detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted IMPORTANT Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you will recei
160. e como L l Loca HE HD oc comot Ha IH rh p dg ours HED TEB ours LL D n ba oura S IED outs ourt EB HEB our 10 Output F pep TT Device OUT 11 IEB IEB OUT 10 our13 E HES our 12 Capacitor i 5 is 0 01 uF Typical OUT 13 OUT 12 OUT 15 I I OUT 14 See notes below Heh 3 OUT 15 OUT 14 Dc EB ED pc com 1 KD KU AS DC 16 HES DC com 1 CN Simplified Schematic e e lt 5DC z m e WA 5e T e lt our ro c ETT Ne d S gt T lt l our pc coM Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 169 ControlLogix DC 90 146V isolated output module Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0H8I Simplified Schematic DC 0 5V 2 o P OUT 0 E m L RTN Vat em OUT 0 C D ControlLogix Backplane Interface lt Display Surge Current Chart 4A Surge E Continuous 60 C 140 F E 2A LLL Ww 170 10 ms Time 1756 OH8l Isolated Wiring i A L DC 0 eia ra ouro e L RINOUTO la s OUT 0 i DC 1 Dle 5 8 OUT 1 RTN OUT 1 epe 70 OUT 1 TE L pcat Fala 9 ag our2 A L RTNOUT 2 enu OUT 2 V DC 3 N 14 13 e OUT 3 Nbrdscisfan RTN OUT 3 16 15 OUT 3 W
161. e connection to the module does not exist IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters Program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for Program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs transition to zero during Program mode whenever that module is inhibited outputs transition to zero You may need to use module inhibiting in these instances e Multiple controllers own the same digital input module A change is required in the module s configuration However the change must be made to the program in all controllers In this case you follow these steps a Inhibit the module b Change configuration in all controllers c Uninhibit the module You want to upgrade a digital I O module We recommend you use this procedure a Inhibit the module b Perform the upgrade c Uninhibit the module You are using a program that includes a module that you do not physically possess yet and you do not want the controller to continually look for a module that does not yet exist In this case you can inhibit the module in your program until it physically resides in the proper slot Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs This section describes how to use CST timestamps in standard and diagnostic I O modules and the CIP Sync timestamps
162. e following events occurs Inthe time period that is 10x the duration of the filter time the input returns to the transitioned state for the duration of the filter time In this case the module sends timestamp data from the initial transition to the controller Inthe time period that is 10x the duration of the filter time the input never remains in the transitioned state for the duration of the filter time In this case the input is recognized but the module does not consider the original transition valid and drops the timestamp EXAMPLE A 1756 IB16lF module is configured for a 2 ms filter time for Off to On transitions In this example three possible scenarios can result after an input transitions from Off to On Scenario 1 The input turns On and remains On for the full 2 ms filter time The module considers the transition valid and sends the data recorded at the transition to the controller Figure 9 on page 91 Scenario 2 The input turns On but turns Off before the 2 ms filter time elapses The module continues to monitor the input for 10x the duration of the filter time Within that time period the input turns On again and remains On for at least 2 ms The module considers the transition valid and sends the data timestamped at the original transition to the controller Figure 10 on page 91 Scenario 3 The input turns On but turns Off before the 2 ms filter time elapses The module continues to monitor the i
163. e last acknowledged event Event x EventDropped BOOL Event Dropped Indicates whether an event has been dropped Connection Data with Event or Listen Ifthe LatchEvents output tag is set the last recorded event is retained until Only with Event acknowledged and a subsequent event is dropped Input Data Timestamp Data e Ifthe LatchEvents output tag is cleared the last unacknowledged event is overwritten 0 An event has not been dropped 1 An event has been dropped Event x CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Valid Indicates whether a valid CIP Sync time master existed on the Connection Data with Event or Listen backplane at the time of an event Only with Event 0 CIP Sync was not available on the backplane at the time of an event Input Data Timestamp Data 1 CIP Sync was available on the backplane at the time of an event Event x CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timout lIndicates that a valid CIP Sync time master existed on the backplane Connection Data with Event or Listen at the time of an event but has since timed out Only with Event 0 CIP Sync has not timed out Input Data Timestamp Data 1 CIP Sync was available on the backplane but has since timed out prior to the event occurring Event x Data INT Module Data Shows the input data for all 16 points on the module at the time an Connection Data with Event or Listen event occurs Data for bits 0 15 is shown as a bit mask where bit 0 is Pt 0 Data and bit Only with Ev
164. e output module is configured for scheduled outputs The outputs will not get applied until the scheduled time has occurred The Controller Tags dialog box below shows examples of the tags created in ladder logic Controller Tags cst controller Scope Esti controller Show Show All 7j Sot Tas Name EM BOOL Decim BOOL Decim DINT 2 Decim DINT DINT Decim AB 17 pem 48 175 AB 175 asaz Time_at_which_Input_Changed_0 lLocat0 1 CSTTimestamp 0 Locat OLC DINT Decim EEE fed 8 a OOOO Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs for Fast 1 0 Modules This section demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs for fast digital I O modules The Change of State timestamp can be used to synchronize the output turning On or Off based on the time that the input transitions The program can be extended to include synchronizing multiple output modules by sending the same timestamp to all output modules In the example below the output follows the state of input 0 but it is delayed by the amount of time in the Delay tag The advantage of using CIP Sync over timers is that the synchronization is performed at the I O module which eliminates any jitter due to controller or communication delays Your control becomes much more deterministic even under changing loads For this synchronization to work properly the value in the D
165. e software on the Connection tab or the message dialog box warning you of the multiple owner condition 2 Make the appropriate configuration data changes in the software For more information about using RSLogix 5000 software to change the configuration see Chapter 7 3 Repeat step 1 and step 2 for all owner controllers making the exact same changes in each 4 Clear the Inhibit checkbox in each owner controller configuration 36 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Input Module Compatibility Chapter 3 Common Module Features Topic Page Input Module Compatibility 37 Output Module Compatibility 38 Common Features 39 Common Features Specific to Input Modules 50 Common Features Specific to Output Modules 54 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers 64 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 65 ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect whether they are On or Off ControlLogix input modules convert AC or DC On Off signals from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor Typical input devices include the following Proximity switches Limit switches Selector switches Float switches Push button switches When designing systems with ControlLogix input modules consider these factors Voltage necessary for your application Current leakage Whether you need a solid s
166. e software to match precisely to establish communication If any attribute does not match precisely I O communication is not permitted with the module or with modules connected through it as in the case of a communication module Use Exact Match keying when you need the system to verify that the module revisions in use are exactly as specified in the project such as for use in highly regulated industries Exact Match keying is also necessary to enable Automatic Firmware Update for the module via the Firmware Supervisor feature from a Logix5000 controller Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 41 Chapter 3 42 Common Module Features EXAMPLE In the following scenario Exact Match keying prevents 1 0 communication The module configuration is for a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 3 1 The physical module is a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 3 2 In this case communication is prevented because the Minor Revision of the module does not match precisely Module Configuration Vendor Allen Bradley e Product Type Digital Input Module E _ F a Catalog Number 1756 IB16D Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 1 Communication is prevented Physical Module Vendor Allen Bradley Product Type Digital Input Module Catalog Number 1756 IB16D Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 2 IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the 1 0 Communication connectio
167. e system time and the modules Connection Data local time The timestamp is in CIP Sync time Output Data Scheduled per This value is typically set to zero but can be updated with the value of the SystemOffsetin Point the controllers TIMESYNCHRONIZE object to enable Time Step Compensation in the module ScheduleTimestamp DINT Schedule Timestamp The baseline CIP Sync time for all schedules The module uses Connection Data the baseline CIP Sync time combined with the offset value in the Schedule Offset tag to Output Data Scheduled per calculate the absolute time a physical output will turn On or Off Point Schedule x ID SINT Schedule ID ldentifies which schedule to apply to an output point Connection Data Valid schedules 1 32 Output Data Scheduled per 0 No schedule Point Schedule x SequenceNumber SINT Schedule Sequence Number lIndicates the sequence count received with a schedule Connection Data The module recognizes a new schedule only when there is a change in sequence number Output Data Scheduled per The first message received initializes the schedule Point Schedule x OutputPointSelect SINT Schedule Output Point Indicates which physical output point is associated with a Connection Data Schedule The module recognizes a new schedule only when there is a change in output Output Data Scheduled per point Point The first message received initializes the schedule Valid values 0 15 Schedule x Da
168. e tab onto the RTB until it stops 5 Repeat step 1 step 4 by using additional U shaped and straight tabs until the module and RTB lock into each other properly Connect the Wires You can use an RTB or a Bulletin 1492 prewired Interface Module IEM to connect wires to your module If you are using an RTB follow the directions below to connect wires to the RTB IFMs are prewired prior to shipping an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field side power is on ATTENTION If multiple power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage 1 The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency 114 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 ATTENTION When using the 1756 TBCH do not wire more than two 0 33 1 3 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 mm 22 16 AWG conductors on any single terminal Use only the same size wires with no intermixing of solid and stranded wire types When using the 1756 TBS6H do not wire more than 1 co
169. e when data is transferred to the owner controller lll Module Properties Local 1 1756 IA16 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI poo ms 0 2 750 0 ms Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Follow these steps to set an RPI value 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Connection tab 2 In the Requested Packet Interval RPI field enter an RPI value 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 51 Chapter 3 52 Common Module Features Enable Change of State The Point column on the left side of the Configuration tab lets you set whether a COS occurs when a field device transitions from Off to On or On to Off Follow these steps to enable or disable COS 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 1 1756 IA16 3 1 Input Fitter Time 1ms vjS9Sms v 8 15 1ms v 9ms x Status Offline Cancel Apply Hep 2 Do one of the following in the Enable Change of State columns e To enable COS for a point check the corresponding Off to On or On to Off checkbox e To disable COS fora point clear the corresponding Off to On or On to Off checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Commo
170. ection to each of the modules referenced by the data Ifa controller has configuration data referencing a slot in the control system the controller periodically checks for the presence ofa device there When a device s presence is detected there the controller automatically sends the configuration data If the data is appropriate to the module found in the slot a connection is made and operation begins If the configuration data is not appropriate the data is rejected and an error message appears in the software In this case the configuration data can be inappropriate for any of a number of reasons For example a module s configuration data may be appropriate except for a mismatch in electronic keying that prevents normal operation The controller maintains and monitors its connection with a module Any break in the connection causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area associated with the module Breaks in the connection can be caused by a module fault or the removal of the module from the chassis while under power RSLogix 5000 software monitors fault status bits to annunciate module failures Rack optimized Connections When a digital I O module is located in a remote chassis with respect to its owner controller you can choose Rack Optimization or Listen only Rack Optimization during module configuration The option you choose depends on the communication module configuration If the communication module uses Li
171. ections 23 Input Module Operation 26 Input Modules in a Local Chassis 27 Input Modules in a Remote Chassis 28 Output Module Operation 31 Output Modules in a Local Chassis 31 Output Modules in a Remote Chassis 32 Listen only Mode 34 Multiple Owner Controllers of Input Modules 34 Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners 35 I O modules are the interface between controllers and field devices in a ControlLogix system Digital I O modules transfer data to devices that require just one bit to be represented 0 or 1 For example a switch is open or closed or a light is on or off Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 19 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Ownership Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software 20 I O modules in a ControlLogix system can be owned by an RSLogix 5000 controller An owner controller fulfills these functions e Stores configuration data for every module that it owns e Sends I O modules configuration data to define module behavior and begin module operation with the control system e Resides in a local or remote chassis in regard to the I O modules position Each ControlLogix I O module must continuously maintain communication with its owner controller to operate normally Typically each module in the system will have only one owner controller Input modules can have more than one owner controller Output modules however are limite
172. ed In other words you can use a rack optimized connection between an owner controller and multiple remote 1 0 modules while simultaneously using a direct connection between that same controller and any other 1 0 modules in the same remote chassis The illustration below shows how a rack optimized connection eliminates the need for three separate connections The owner controller in the local chassis communicates with all the I O modules in the remote chassis but uses only one connection The ControlNet communication module sends data from the modules simultaneously at the RPI Figure 2 Rack optimized Connection Local Chassis een o uuu o ooo ef One Connection for All Remote 1 0 Remote Chassis 84 8 200 TOD ControlNet Network 41021 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 25 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Input Module Operation 26 Suggestions for Rack optimized Connections We recommend that you use a rack optimized connection for these applications e Standard digital I O modules e Non fused digital outp
173. elay tag must be long enough to account for any controller backplane and network delays In this example the controller input and output modules all reside in the same chassis but they can reside in separate chassis as long as they are all part of the same synchronized CIP Sync system Timestamp units are microseconds IMPORTANT Unlike standard and diagnostic 1 0 modules that use CST for timestamps fast 1 0 modules use CIP Sync timestamps which are a full 64 bits in width Manipulation of CIP Sync time values requires the use of 64 bit math The following example uses 64 bit Add on Instructions contained in the LINT 64 bit signed 2 s complement integer Math Library located at http samplecode rockwellautomation com Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The following illustrations show the ladder instructions the program uses The rungs perform these tasks e Rungs 0 and 1 capture the rising or falling timestamps for input 0 ofa 1756 IB16IF module e Rung2 executes only once at the transition from Program to Run mode It initializes LastInputTimestamp which is used to detect a change of state on the input point by checking to see if the timestamp of the input data has changed This rung also clears the output modules TimestampOffset bit to disable its Time Step Compensation algorithm Local 2 I Pt 0 Data OP
174. elay to energize the input typically 290 us on the 1756 IB16 module e User configurable filter time of 0 1 or 2 ms e ASIC scan of 200 us In the worst case scenario with a filter time of 0 ms the 1756 IB16 module has a 490 us signal propagation delay These times are not guaranteed For nominal and maximum delay times for each module see the 1756 ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Specifications Technical Data publication 1756 TD002 Output Modules ControlLogix output modules receive a signal from the controller and process it internally via hardware and an ASIC scan before sending a signal to the output device via the RT B ASIC Delay Hardware Delay acd C Q Signal Received from Controller 42702 N Signal Sent from RTB Output Point 22 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Connections Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 The table defines some of the delay factors that affect the signal propagation on an I O module Description Hardware How the module is configured and the variance between the type of modules affects how the signal is processed ASIC ASIC scan 200 ps EXAMPLE Atypical delay time can be estimated despite the number of factors that might contribute For example if you are turning on a 1756 0B16E module at 24V DC in 25 C 77 F conditions the signal propagation delay is affected by these factors e Hardwa
175. emote chassis immediately sends the module data over the network to the owner controller as long as it has not sent data within a timeframe that is one quarter the value of the digital input module s RPI This prevents flooding the network with data For example if a digital input module uses an RPI 100 ms the EtherNet IP module sends module data immediately on receiving it if another data packet was not sent within the last 25 ms For more information about specifying an RPI rate see the Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual publication 1756 RM094 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Module Operation Output Modules ina Local Chassis Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 An owner controller sends output data to an output module when either one of two things occur e At the end of every one of its tasks local chassis only e At the rate specified in the modules RPI When an output module physically resides in a remote chassis with respect to the owner controller the owner controller sends data to the output module only at the RPI rate specified for the module Updates are not performed at the end of the owner controller s tasks Whenever the module receives data from the controller it immediately multicasts the output commands it received to the rest of the system The actual output data is echoed by the output module as input data and
176. ensity are used For example the 1756 IA16I module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because this is a 16 point module only the first 16 bits 0 15 are used in the module fault word Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 79 Chapter 4 80 Diagnostic Module Features Module fault Word All modules Field Power Loss Word 1756 IA8D only Open Wire Word Fault bits in the field power loss word and open wire word are logically entered into the module fault word Depending on the module type a bit set in the module fault word can mean multiple things as indicated in the table Table 13 Bits Set in Module fault Word Condition Communications fault Bits Set All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Field power loss Open wire Only the bit affected is set to 1 The following illustration provides an overview of the fault reporting process for digital input modules Bit 31 Bit 0 1 1 A communications fault sets all bits in the module fault word A field power loss or open wire condition sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word Group 1 Group 0 1 A loss of field power sets the bit for that group in the field power loss word and also
177. ent 15 is Pt 15 Data Input Data Timestamp Data 0 On a per bit basis indicates the corresponding bit in the Pt x Data input tag was Off when the event occurred 1 On a per bit basis indicates the corresponding bit in the Pt x Data input tag was On when the event occurred Event x Timestamp DINT Event Timestamp Records a 64 bit timestamp in CIP Sync format at the time an Connection Data with Event or Listen event occurs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data 193 AppendixB Tag Definitions Fast Output Module Tags 194 ControlLogix fast output modules have three types of tags e Configuration Structure of data sent from the controller to the I O module upon powerup e Input Structure of data continually sent from the I O module to the controller containing the current operational status of the module e Output Structure of data continually sent from the controller to the I O module that can modify the module behavior IMPORTANT The Module Definition column in each table lists the connection type and input data type combinations that are required to create the corresponding tag For more information about defining connection and input data types see Create a New Module on page 129 Topic Page 1756 0B16IEF Module 194 1756 0B16lEFS Module 202 1756 0B161EF Module IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 software version 18
178. equency is under 4 kHz period of 250 us When the module detects a short duration pulse at an input point it sets the corresponding bit for the Pt x NewDataOffOn or Pt x NewDataOnOff input tag This bit remains latched until acknowledged As a result you can use this bit to detect a transition that is too fast to be detected by the program scan You can also determine how rapid the transition was by configuring the module to latch timestamps for the point as described in Per Point Timestamping and Change of State on page 87 To acknowledge the last captured pulse and reset the pulse latch you set the rising edge of the corresponding bit in these output tags Pt x NewDataOffOnAck Acknowledges that the input point has transitioned to an On state and resets the pulse latch e Pt x NewDataOnOffAck Acknowledges that the input point has transitioned to an Off state and resets the pulse latch You can change output tag values in program logic while normal module operation continues or through the RSLogix 5000 tag editor For more information about module tags refer to Appendix B Once a pulse latch is reset for an input point the next pulse at that point sets the corresponding bit in the Pt x NewDataOffOn or Pt x NewDataOnOff input tags Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Per Point Timestamping and Change of State With per point timestamping each in
179. er Manual publication 1756 UMO01 ControlLogix digital input modules multicast fault and status data to any owner controller or listening controller All input modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting The table lists the fault word and the associated tag that can be examined in program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard input module Table 4 Fault Word on Input Modules Word Description Module fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital input modules All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each modules density are used For example the 1756 IA16I module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because this is a 16 point module only 16 bits 0 15 are used in the module fault word Table 5 Bits Set in Module fault Word Condition Bits Set Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density The following illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix standard digital input modules Bit 31 Bit 0 A communication fault sets all bits in the module fault word 42676 64 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers Common Module Features Chapter 3 C
180. ereiic END e Cortal shams O CER2 Copy File Source WHO_Inloimation 4 Dest WHO produc code Lenglhi 2 COP Copy File Sonce WHO_Inlormator 6 Dee WHO maj revieon Lerigih 1 COP Cony File m Source WHO Inlomalior 7 Ded WHO minor revision Lerglh 1 COP Copy File 71 Source WHO Infomalisr t Dest WHO status Length 2 CP CNP Copy Fie __ Copy Fle Souce WHO Irfomaticn 0 Dest WHO vendor Length 2 CoP Copy Fila Sources WHO_Inlormatior 15 Dest WHO oscil_sirieg0 Length 3 Sowce WHO In amatier 10 Dex WHO serial nurbar Lengh 4 COP 4 Copy Fie L Sowce WHO Jn cmaben 4 Does WHO olnng_iergth Lengh 1 IEnd 3L MainRoutine 41 The rungs perform these functions e RungO constantly polls the module for WHO status To conserve bandwidth only poll for status when necessary e Rung 1 extracts the product type and catalog code e Rung2 extracts the module s major and minor revisions e Rung3 extracts the modules status information e Rung extracts the vendor ID and serial number e Rung5 extracts the modules ASCII text string and the length of the text string in bytes Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The table defines the values returned for ea
181. ernal Resdw e RON Riead write Style Constant Open MESSAGE Configuration 6 Complete the fields on the New Tag dialog box Field Description Name Type the tag name including the slot number in the module Description Type an option tag description Usage Use the default Type Use the default Alias for Leave blank Data Type Choose MESSAGE Scope Choose the Controller scope Note Message tags can be created only with the Controller scope External Access Use the default Style Leave blank Constant Leave blank Open MESSAGE Configuration 7 Click OK Leave the box blank if you do NOT want to automatically access the Message Configuration screen when OK is clicked You still can access the Message Configuration screen later by following the procedures on page 217 216 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C Enter Message Configuration After creating a tag you must enter certain parameters for the message configuration This information is entered on the Configuration and Communication tabs of the Message Configuration dialog box The Message Configuration dialog box is accessed by clicking the box with the ellipses in the Message Control field SG 0 Message Message Control Sic CO Reset Fg INI End IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 software version 1
182. ership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x PWMEnable BOOL Enable PWM When set the pulse train for the output point is controlled by the current Connection Data PWM configuration 0 PWM is disabled default 1 PWM is enabled and the output uses PWM when the output is On Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer 195 Appendix B Tag Definitions Table 47 1756 0B16IEF Module Configuration Tags continued Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Pt x PWMExtendCyde BOOL Extend PWM Cycle Determines the output behavior when the value in the Connection Data Pt x PWMOnTime output tag is less than the value in the Pt x PWMMinimunOnTime Output Data Data or Scheduled configuration tag Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag per Module 0 The duration of the pulse cycle is not extended default If the bit is cleared when the or On time is less than the minimum On time the output is never enabled Connection Peer Ownership 1 The duration of the pulse cycle is extended to maintain the On time to cycle time ratio Output Data Data with Peer while taking into account the minimum On time P a IMPORTANT An extension of the pulse cycle is limited to 10 times the cycle time If the requested On time is less than 1 10 of the minimum On t
183. erwise outputs turn On immediately at the start Output Data Scheduled per of a cycle Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag Point 0 Does not stagger output On transitions default Outputs will turn On immediately when the Data tag is set to 1 beginning the PWM cycle with a rising edge 1 Staggers output On transitions All outputs configured for PWM staggering will turn On at different intervals to minimize a possible power surge if many outputs became energized simultaneously PWMI x CycleLimitEnable BOOL Enable PWM Cycle Limit Determines whether to allow only a fixed number of pulse Connection Data cycles to occur Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag 0 Pulse cycles continue to occur until the output turns Off default 1 Allows only the number of pulse cycles defined via the PWM CycleLimit tag to occur Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Scheduled per Point 203 Appendix B Tag Definitions Table 50 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Scheduled per Point Output continued Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition PWM x ExecuteAllCycles BOOL Execute All PWM Cycles Determines whether to execute the number of cycles defined Connection Data via the PWM CycleLimit tag regardless of the output logic Requires PWM to be enabled via Output Data Scheduled per the PWM Enable tag and a cycle limit to be enabled v
184. es Printed Circuit Board 20861 M 20862 M Installation of the module is now complete 112 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Key the Removable Terminal Block Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 Key the removable terminal block RTB to prevent inadvertently connecting the wrong wiring in the RTB to your module Wedge and U shaped bands are manually inserted into the RTB and module This process hinders a wired RTB from being accidentally inserted into a module that does not match the positioning of the respective tabs Key positions on the module that correspond to unkeyed positions on the RTB For example if you place a U shaped keying band in slot 4 on the module do not insert a wedge shaped tab in slot 4 on the RTB or your RTB will not mount on the module We recommend that you use a unique keying pattern for each slot in the chassis Follow these steps to key the RTB 1 To key the module insert the U shaped band with the longer side near the terminals 2 Push the band onto the module until it snaps into place 20850 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 113 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules 3 Tokey the RTB in positions that correspond to unkeyed module positions insert the straight wedge shaped tab on the RTB with the rounded edge first Module side of RTB 67 20851 M 4 Push th
185. ese cases e The electronic keying of the module is specified as Compatible or Disabled Keying e The electronic keying of the module is Exact Keying then additional steps are required See page 238 for details The use of the upgraded ASIC also impacts the firmware revisions that can be flash upgraded to the module Digital I O modules at Major Revision 3 x cannot be backflashed to any 2 x firmware revision Digital I O modules at firmware revision 2 x cannot be flash upgraded to any firmware revision 3 x Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 237 AppendixF Major Revision Upgrades If Using a Compatible or Disabled Keying 1 0 Configuration If Using an Exact Match Keying Configuration 238 If you are replacing a 2 x module with a 3 x module and have configured the 2 x module to use Compatible or Disabled Keying further steps are not required If you use Compatible or Disabled Keying configurations 3 x modules can be used as a direct replacements for 2 x modules If you are currently using a 2 x module configured at Exact Match keying consider changing the module electronic keying in the I O configuration to Compatible or Disabled Keying If you are replacing a 2 x module with a 3 x module and must use Exact Match keying in the I O configuration take additional action depending on your version of RSLogix 5000 software If you use Exact Match keying and RSLogix 5000 software version 13
186. figuration tab E Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8E 3 1 General Connection Module Info Diagnostics Backplane Output State During Enable Diagnostics for Enable Diag Latching Taaaaxu T0003 L xi E x zl E zl E Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode f Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in Enable Diag Latching column e To enable diagnostic latching for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable diagnostic latching for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 61 Chapter3 Common Module Features Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by using these methods e Reset Diagnostic Latch service e Software reset during online monitoring e Cycling power to the module s Follow these steps to a reset a latched fault through RSLogix 5000 software during online monitoring 1 On the Modules Properties screen click the Diagnostics tab E Module Properties Local 5 1756 OA8E 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane m Reset Electronic eg Diagnostics Status Running 2 In the Reset Latched Diagnostics column click Reset next to
187. g characteristics e Messages use unscheduled portions of system communication bandwidth e One service is performed per instruction e Performing module services does not impede module functionality such as sampling inputs or applying new outputs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 213 AppendixC Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Processing Real time Control Services sent through message instructions are not as time critical as the module and Module Services One Service Performed Per Instruction Create a New Tag 214 behavior defined during configuration and maintained by a real time connection Therefore the module processes messaging services only after the needs of the I O connection have been met For example you may want to unlatch all process alarms on the module but real time control of your process is still occurring by using the input value from that same channel Because the input value is critical to your application the module prioritizes the sampling of inputs ahead of the unlatch service request This prioritization allows input channels to be sampled at the same frequency and the process alarms to be unlatched in the time between sampling and producing the real time input data Message instructions will only cause a module service to be performed once per execution For example ifa message instruction sends a service to the module to unlatch the
188. ging state consistently every two seconds and the RPI is set at 750 ms the data transfer will look like the illustration 1 1 1 q 1 i 1 q J il 1 1 ij 1 1 I 1 1 i 1 1 I 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 I 500 750 1250 1500 1750 2250 2500 2750 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 I 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 Second 2 Seconds 3 Seconds 41381 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 27 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Input Modules ina Remote Chassis 28 Because the RPI and COS functions are asynchronous to the program scan it is possible for an input to change state during program scan execution The point must be buffered to prevent this from occurring To buffer the point you can copy the input data from your input tags to another structure and use the data from there TIP To minimize traffic and conserve bandwidth use a larger RPI value if COS is enabled and the module is in the same chassis as its owner controller Trigger Event Tasks When configured ControlLogix digital input modules can trigger an event task The event task lets you execute a section of logic immediately when an event or receipt of new data occurs Your ControlLogix digital I O module can trigger event tasks whenever module input data changes state Refer to these considerations when using a digital input module to trigger an event task e Only one input module can trigger a specific event task e
189. gnostic digital input modules Diagnostic Input Modules Topic Page Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules 71 Open Wire Detection 73 Field Power Loss Detection 74 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules If the diagnostic change of state feature is enabled a diagnostic input module sends new data to the owner controller when one of the events described in the table occurs Event Description RPI A user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer Change of State Configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off and Off to On The data will be sent at the RPI rate where there is no change of state By default this setting is always enabled for input modules Diagnostic Change of State occurs Information updates when any change in the diagnostics for an input module 71 Chapter4 Diagnostic Module Features Although the RPI occurs continuously the COS feature lets you to decide whether changes in a module diagnostic detection should cause the module to send real time data to the owner controller 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab lil Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 Open
190. he hour is complete To trigger the PWM output to restart immediately with a new cycle time or On time turn the output Off and then back On EXAMPLE If PWMOnTime is 0 1 second and PWMCycleTime is 1 0 second and the PWMCycleTime is changed to 0 5 second just after the output turns On the output will stay on for 0 1 second and then turn Off for 0 9 second to complete the cycle before the new 0 5 second cycle begins IMPORTANT Before PWM will function you must enable PWM during configuration and define the PWM cycle time and On time in the PWMCydeTime and PWMOnTime output tags If PWM is enabled PWMEnable 1 and the output is instructed to turn On Data 1 the output generates a PWM signal Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 97 Chapter5 Fast Module Features Figure 13 compares two applications in which the output is instructed to turn On for 4 5 seconds e Inthe application without PWM a single pulse is generated The pulse remains active for the same length of time the Data output tag is On 4 5 seconds e Inthe application with PWM a series of pulses are generated Each pulse is active for a configured On time of 5 seconds or 50 of the 1 second cycle time The Data output tag is On for 4 5 seconds Figure 13 PWM Application without PWM Application with PWM Output Logic Output logic is On for 4 5 seconds Output Logic Output logic is On for 4 5 seconds Output State Output is
191. he peer input Connection Peer Ownership module resides Output Data Data with Peer Valid values 0 16 e 1 No input module has been identified as a peer InputPartnerlD SINT Peer Partner ID Identifies the peer input module that controls outputs on the Connection Peer Ownership 1756 OB16IEF module The type of module determines the connection type of format of Output Data Data with Peer input data Valid values 0 None default 1 1756 IB16lF 2 1756 LSC8XIB8I Pt x FaultMode BOOL Fault Mode Used in conjunction with the Pt x FaultValue tag to determine the state of Connection Data outputs when a communication failure occurs Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Uses the output value defined in the Pt x FaultValue configuration tag default per Module 1 Holds the last state of the output for the length of time defined in the or Pt x FaultValueStateDuration tag If PWM is enabled for the output point and the output Connection Peer Ownership is currently On the output will continue PWM until the cycle limit is reached or a final fault _ state goes into effect via the Pt x FaultFinalState tag O tput Data LG with Reer Pt x FaultValue BOOL Fault Value Defines the output value when a fault occurs Holds the configured state of Connection Data the output for the length of time defined in the Pt x FaultValueStateDuration tag Output Data Data or Scheduled Requires the corresponding bit in the FaultMode
192. hen a system is configured we recommend that you configure your module by using the earliest that is lowest revision of the physical module that you believe will be used in the system By doing this you can avoid the case of a physical module rejecting the keying request because it is an earlier revision than the one configured in the software EXAMPLE In the following scenario Compatible Keying prevents 1 0 communication The module configuration is for a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 3 3 The physical module is a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 3 2 In this case communication is prevented because the minor revision of the module is lower than expected and may not be compatible with 3 3 Module Configuration lee YASAET6O 16 Ped 10 304 OC Deagrentte bot Vendor Allen Bradley eae Mey Product Type Digital Input Module rec te 5 Catalog Number 1756 IB16D Dein Cowefamat Fa Dagens veu Ove Major Revision 3 aee z D edi ra Bare rr Minor Revision 3 Communication is prevented Physical Module Vendor Allen Bradley Product Type Digital Input Module Catalog Number 1756 IB16D Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 43 Chapter3 Common Module Features EXAMPLE In the following scenario Compatible Keying allows 1 0 communication The module configuration is for a 1756 IB16D mod
193. hese steps to configure open wire detection 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab lil Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Enable Change of State Enable Diagnostics tor Vv Iv Iv Vv m r p F r Kaia aa ian ian Ii T SII SI o o oan ian i IER ERER 71717171717 ERER IV Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the Open Wire middle column e To enable the open wire detection for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable open wire detection for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 73 Chapter 4 74 Diagnostic Module Features Field Power Loss Detection For the standard digital output modules the Field Power Loss detection feature is found on the 1756 IA8D module only When field power to the module is lost or zero cross cannot be detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted IMPORTANT Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you will receive faults for those points during operation This feature has a corresponding tag that can be exam
194. high high alarm on a particular channel that channel s high high alarm will unlatch but may be set on a subsequent channel sample The message instruction must then be re executed to unlatch the alarm a second time This section shows how to create a tag in ladder logic when adding a message instruction Ladder logic is located in the main routine within RSLogix 5000 software Follow these steps to create a tag 1 Start the RSLogix 5000 software and open an existing I O project or create a new one 2 On the Controller Organizer double click MainRoutine Expand MainProgram to see Main Routine as a sub menu item fs RSLogix 5000 Controller Digital IO 1756 File Edit View Search Logic Communications alsel S seel lm Offline fl RUN No Forces k NoEds m vo Redundancy Bo a Controller Controller Digital IO A Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler E1 3 Tasks El fa MainTask EB eg MainProgram Program Tags bm Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C A graphic that looks like a ladder with rungs appears in the right side of the RSLogix 5000 software program You attach run time service such as a message instruction to the rungs and then download the information to a controller You can tell that the rung is in Edit mode because of the
195. ia the PWM CycleLimitEnable tag Point 0 The output logic determines the number of cycles to produce default 1 The PWM CydeLimit tag determines the number of cycles to produce regardless of output logic For example if you specify a cycle limit of 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles all 4 cycles will still occur despite the output being instructed to turn Off PWM x GydeLimit SINT PWM Cycle Limit Defines the number of pulse cycles to occur when the output turns Connection Data On Output Data Scheduled per e Ifthe corresponding bit in the PWM ExecuteAllCydes tag is set the configured number Point of cycles will occur even if the output turns Off e Ifthe corresponding bit in the PWM ExecuteAllCycles tag is cleared the configured number of cycles will occur only if the output remains On For example if the cycle limit is 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles the 4th cycle will not occur The default cycle limit is 10 Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag and cycle limits to be enabled via the PWM CycleLimitEnable tag PWM x MinimumOnTime REAL PWM Minimum On Time Defines the minimum length of time required for the output Connection Data to turn On Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag Valid values 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or 0 100 percent Table 51 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Data Output Output Data Scheduled per Point outputs when
196. iately Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 29 Chapter 2 30 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the worst case scenario the module performs an RPI multicast just after the reserved network slot has passed In this case the owner controller will not receive data until the next available network slot IMPORTANT Enabling the COS feature on an input module in a remote chassis allows the module to multicast data at both the RPI rate and when the input changes state This helps to reduce the worst case time When selecting values for the remotely located module s RPI system throughput is optimized when its RPI value is a power of two times the current NUT running on the ControlNet network For example the following table shows recommended RPI values for a system by using a NUT of 5 ms Table 2 Recommended RPI Values for System by Using NUT of 5 ms NUT 5 ms x2 x2 x2 x2 x24 x2 x26 x2 Optimal RPI 5ms 10 ms 20 ms 40 ms 80 ms 160 ms 320ms 640 ms Values ms Remote Input Modules Connected via the EtherNet IP Network When remote digital input modules are connected to the owner controller via an EtherNet IP network data is transferred to the owner controller at these times e At the RPI the module produces data within its own chassis e Atthe COS if enabled the 1756 EtherNet IP communication module in the r
197. ime the output will remain Off and the cycle will not extend Pt x PWMOnTimelnPercent BOOL PWM On Time in Percent Determines whether PWM On time is defined as a Connection Data percentage of the cycle time or is defined in seconds Requires PWM to be enabled via the Output Data Data or Scheduled Pt x PWMEnable tag per Module 0 Defines PWM On time in seconds default or 1 Defines PWM On time as a percentage Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x PWMStaggerOutput BOOL Stagger PWM Outputs When set minimizes the load on the power system by Connection Data staggering On transitions for outputs Otherwise outputs turn On immediately at the start Output Data Data or Scheduled of a cycle Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag per Module 0 Does not stagger output On transitions default Outputs will turn On immediately or when the Pt x Data tag is set to 1 beginning the PWM cycle with a rising edge Connection Peer Ownership 1 Staggers output On transitions All outputs configured for PWM staggering will turn Output Data Data with Peer On at different intervals to minimize a possible power surge if many outputs became P energized simultaneously Pt x PWMCycleLimitEnable BOOL Enable PWM Cycle Limit Determines whether to allow only a fixed number of pulse Connection Data cycles to occur Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Pu
198. ime master has timed or out The module is currently using its local clock Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OutputOverrideStatus BOOL Output Override Status Indicates whether local output data or logic point is set upto Connection Peer Ownership be overridden by the value in the Pt x OverrideOutputValue output tag Requires the Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverrideOutputEn output tag to be enabled 0 The override feature for the corresponding output is not enabled 1 The override feature for the corresponding output is enabled Pt x PeerlnputOverrideStatus BOOL Peer Input Override Status Indicates whether peer input data mapped to the Connection Peer Ownership corresponding output point is set up to be overridden by the value in the Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverridePeerlnputValue output tag Requires the O Pt x OverridePeerlnputEn output tag to be enabled 0 The override feature for peer inputs is not enabled 1 The override feature for peer inputs is enabled Pt x PeerWindows0OverrideStatus BOOL Peer Window 0 Override Status Indicates whether peer window 0 datamappedto Connection Peer Ownership the corresponding output point is set up to be overridden by the value in the Pt x OverridePeerWindow0Value output tag Requires the O Pt x OverridePeerWindowOEn output tag to be enabled 0 The override feature for peer win
199. in fast I O modules Use Coordinated System Time with Standard and Diagnostic 1 0 Modules Time masters generate a 64 bit coordinated system time CST for their respective chassis The CST is a chassis specific time that is not synchronized with or in any way connected to the time generated over the ControlNet network to establish a network update time NUT For more information about NUT refer to Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software on page 20 You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and timestamp input data with a relative time reference of when that input data changes state IMPORTANT Because only one CST value is returned to the controller when any input point changes state we recommend that you use timestamping on only one input point per module The following table describes how you can use CST timestamps Topic Description Timestamping for a The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a particular input module sequence of events point by timestamping the input data To determine a sequence of events you must do the following Set the input modules communication format to CST Timestamped Input Data Enable COS for the input point where a sequence will occur and disable COS for all other points on the module TIP If you decide to configure multiple input points for COS your module generates a unique CST each time any of those input points change state as long a
200. ined in the user program in the event of a fault For information on these tags see Chapter A Follow these steps to enable or disable diagnostics for field power loss 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab E Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8E 3 1 Enable Diag Latching M M M M M iv i iv i iv Li iv Li lv L v Ile le e la lal If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode f Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Communications Failure 2 Doone of the following in the Enable Diagnostics for Field Power Loss column e To enable field power loss detection for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable field loss detection for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules Topic Page Field Wiring Options 75 No Load Detection 75 Field side Output Verification 76 Pulse Test 78 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules 79 Field Wiring Options As with diagnostic input modules ControlLogix diagnostic output modules provide isolated or nonisolated wiring options I O modules provide point to point grou
201. inition dialog box 2 Use the table below to choose a connection format and input data type from the Connection and Input Data pull down menus IMPORTANT To enable timestamping choose Timestamp Data as the input data type Connection Format Input Data Data Return Data Timestamp Data Module returns input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync system time Data Module returns input data without COS timestamps This format is useful when the highest possible throughput is required and timestamps are not required Data with Event Timestamp Data Results in two input connections e Connection to return input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync System time Connection to initiate event tasks See page 93 Listen Only Timestamp Data These formats have the same definition as those above except that they are Listen only connections Data Listen Only with Event Timestamp Data TIP You can change the connection format at any time after creating a new module except when you are online The AOP will apply all the configuration data and create the tags required for the new connection format Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 3 On the New Module or Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Timestamp fields only appear on the Configuration tab when you choose Timestamp Data from the Input Data pull down menu on the Module Definiti
202. ion 0 0 cee eee e ees 50 Status Indicator Information sc 0cecaesreccdddavierdasdecevaes 50 Common Features Specific to Input Modules 08 50 Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State 51 Seb RDPI iuste cub oho ere RUes da RV RUNDE d 51 Enable Change of Statins cepe Erbe hd p eb ee a3 ERbECUA 52 Software Configurable Filter Times 1 22 road 53 Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Input Modules 53 Multiple Input Point Densities ccscicuccccnctsesscsresiedesos es 54 Common Features Specific to Output Modules 04 54 Configurable Point level Output States 0 cece 55 Output Data PeNOciasccxcveiaccnaes Crete In PR PARKS Pe RE 56 Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Output Modules 56 Multiple Output Point Denstties ususseee dun Poza e o ES hd kn ES 57 Electronic Fusing aves sesiodes tei convereekevaweseoneevveregees 57 Field Power Loss Detection 122 esse ce ead i e CERO 60 Diagnostic Latch of Information 00 00 cece eee eee 61 Timescheduled Output Control 1 i5 sss ovshwowsssonaaeeees anes 63 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers 64 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 65 Chapter 4 Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility 1 15 2 eee rr 67 Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility esueeuue 68 Diagnostic Peat ll ss coe peas kbe asd ERR EIER CREME Fiera 68 Diagnostic
203. ion Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMExtendCycle BOOL Extend PWM Cycle Determines the output behavior when the value in the PWM OnTime output tag is less than the value in the PWM MinimunOnTime configuration tag Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag 0 The duration of the pulse cycle is not extended default If the bit is cleared when the On time is less than the minimum On time the output is never enabled 1 The duration of the pulse cycle is extended to maintain the On time to cycle time ratio while taking into account the minimum On time IMPORTANT An extension of the pulse cycle is limited to 10 times the cycle time If the requested On time is less than 1 10 of the minimum On time the output will remain Off and the cycle will not extend Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMOnTimelnPercent BOOL PWM On Time in Percent Determines whether PWM On time is defined as a percentage of the cycle time or is defined in seconds Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag 0 Defines PWM On time in seconds default 1 Defines PWM On time as a percentage Connection Data Output Data Data Pt x PWMStaggerOutput BOOL Stagger PWM Outputs When set minimizes the load on the power system by staggering On transitions for outputs Otherwise outputs turn On immediately at the start of a cycle Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag 0 Does not stagger output On
204. ion Data PWM configuration Output Data Scheduled per 0 PWM is disabled default Point 1 PWM is enabled and the output uses PWM when the output is On PWMI x ExtendCycle BOOL Extend PWM Cycle Determines the output behavior when the value in the Connection Data PWM OnTime output tag is less than the value in the PWM MinimunOnTime configuration Output Data Scheduled per tag Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM Enable tag Point 0 The duration of the pulse cycle is not extended default If the bit is cleared when the On time is less than the minimum On time the output is never enabled 1 The duration of the pulse cycle is extended to maintain the On time to cycle time ratio while taking into account the minimum On time IMPORTANT An extension of the pulse cycle is limited to 10 times the cycle time If the requested On time is less than 1 10 of the minimum On time the output will remain Off and the cycle will not extend PWMI x OnTimelnPercent BOOL PWM On Time in Percent Determines whether PWM On time is defined as a Connection Data percentage of the cycle time or is defined in seconds Requires PWM to be enabled via the Output Data Scheduled per PWM Enable tag Point 0 Defines PWM On time in seconds default 1 Defines PWM On time as a percentage PWM x StaggerOutput BOOL Stagger PWM Outputs When set minimizes the load on the power system by Connection Data staggering On transitions for outputs Oth
205. ions Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code lowest T number may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation Informations sur l utilisation de cet quipement en environnements dangereux Les produits marqu s CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qu une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livr avec des marquages sur sa plaque d identification qui indiquent le code de temp rature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combin s dans un syst me le code de temp rature le plus d favorable code de temp rature le plus faible peut tre utilis pour d terminer le code de temp rature global du syst me Les combinaisons d quipements dans le syst me sont sujettes inspection par les autorit s locales qualifi es au moment de l installation WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD N e Donot disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is
206. iring Dc 4 T 18 17 OUT 4 RTNOUT4 39 19 4 OUT 4 e 05H 165 2 alg OUT 5 i Daisy 9 RTN OUT 5 24 23d OUT 5 chain to e DC6 9 C526 25 OUT6 e th V RIBS o _ RTN OUT 6 Qiz 27 8 OUT 6 N amp D0C7 D 30 29 d OUT 7 y B 1 aa V eo RTN OUT 7 Cy sif OUT i Not used Not used Daisy 34 33 CD chainto Not used Dl 359 Not used other RTBs DCCOM Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0N8 ControlLogix AC 10 30V output module Simplified Schematic Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 0N8 45V L1 0 i T 3 1 0 EB E OUT 0 3 SERES ER h ay XY L1 0 G5 OUT 1 AX F T T T load OUT 0 L1 0 Ie d OUT2 lt ontrolLogix Backplane Interface 11 0 a5 ia OUT 3 1 Display s 1 0 ie lap Not Used Surge Current Chart 1 14 EB dd our 4 Surge a mi 20A L1 1 p IS OUT 5 Ce WIND 5 L1 1 EB IED outs 3 NE LONE L1 1 a5 G5 OUT 7 2A ob i9 TE I WT L2 L1 1 e Not Used E Dio ee 0 43 ms Time fC Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 171 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0V16E ControlLogix DC
207. is communication 1 0 Status Yellow The input is On Fault Status Red The input has encountered a fault Check the input point at the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 177 Appendix A 1756 IA8D 1756 1A16 ACINPUT 1 0 Status 3 Indicator CUM s 01234567 0 Faut AE RT01234567 Te Status Indicator 6 DIAGNOSTIC 1756 IB16D DCINPUT Troubleshoot Your Module Figure 21 Input Module Status Indicators by Catalog Number 1756 IB16 1756 IB161 1756 IC16 1756 1616 1756 IH161 1756 IV16 1756 IB16IF DCINPUT DCINPUT 101234567 HT01234567 ST 89 10 11 12 1314 15 FLT 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 DIAGNOSTIC 0 K Status Indicators for Output Modules 178 OK Status S 01234567 0 S 01234567 Q Indicator s sonnei M s sonarus K 8 8 PEER DEVICE 1756 IA8D 1756 IA161 1756 1432 1756 1V32 1756 IM161 1756 IN16 DC INPUT 4 ACINPUT 101234567 3 3 S 01234567 sell st 89101112131415 K 3111112222 6789 012 3 s12222 2233 4567 8901 20945 ControlLogix output modules support the status indicators described in Table 32 below The available status indicators vary by module catalog number as
208. it checkbox is cleared and pulse cycles continue to occur until the output turns Off Cycle Limit Enter the maximum number of pulse cycles you want to occur on each output CPt x PWMCydeLimit CPWM CydeLimit logic transition when Enable Cycle Limit is checked e Ifyou check the Execute All Cycles checkbox below the specified number of cycles will occur even if the Data output tag turns Off before the completion of the specified number of cycles Ifyou clear the Execute All Cycles checkbox below the specified number of cycles will occur only if the Data output tag remains On for a sufficient amount of time for the specified number of cycles For example if you specify a cycle limit of 4 and the output turns Off after 3 cycles the 4th cycle will not occur This field is only available when the Enable Cycle Limit checkbox is checked By default the cycle limit is 10 Valid values are 1 27 Execute All Cycles Check the checkbox to always execute the number of cycles specified in the Cycle CPt x PWMExecuteAllCydes CPWM ExecuteAllCycles Limit field even if the Data output tag turns Off For example if you specify a cycle limit of 2 and the output turns Off after 1 cycle the second cycle will still occur despite the output turning Off See Figure 16 on page 100 If the output logic transitions multiple times before the cycle limit is reached all subsequent transitions will be ignored until the cycle limit is reached On
209. itions Standard and Diagnostic ControlLogix standard and diagnostic digital output modules have three types of Output Module Tags eS e Configuration Structure of data sent from the controller to the I O module upon powerup e Input Structure of data continually sent from the I O module to the controller containing the current operational status of the module e Output Structure of data continually sent from the controller to the I O module that can modify the module behavior IMPORTANT The table lists all possible standard or diagnostic output module tags In each application the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Table 37 Standard Output Module Configuration Tags Name Data Type Definition FaultMode DINT Fault Mode Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs 1bit per point See FaultValue 0 Use FaultValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State FaultValue DINT Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs 1 bit per point See FaultMode 0 Off 1 0n ProgMode DINT Program Mode Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program 1 bit per point mode See ProgValue 0 Use ProgValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State ProgValue DINT Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the s
210. k The other end of the cable assembly is an RTB that plugs into the front of the I O module All of the prewired cables use 0 326 mm 22 AWG wire Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 239 AppendixG 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Additional prewired cable combinations include the following e Digital I O module ready cables with free connectors wire into standard terminal blocks or other type of connectors The other end of the cable assembly is an RTB that plugs into the front of the I O module 1 0 Module Prewired Cable with Free Connectors Terminal Block Most of the I O module ready cables use 0 823 mm 18 AWG conductors for higher current applications or longer cable runs e IFM ready cables have a cable connection to attach to the IFM prewired to one end The other end has free connectors to wire to I O modules or other components Components IFM ready Cable IFM The IFM ready cables use 0 326 mm 22 AWG wire Table 65 on page 241 lists the IFMs and prewired cables that can be used with ControlLogix digital I O modules IMPORTANT Forthe latest list see the Digital Analog Programmable Controller Wiring Systems Technical Data publication 1492 TD008 240 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1492 IFMs
211. known to be nonhazardous e Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product e Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class Division 2 If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous European Hazardous Location Approval WARNING RISQUE D EXPLOSION e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher l quipement e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes reli s cet quipement l aide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs filet s ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit e La substitution de composants peut rendre cet quipement inadapt une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2 e S assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de changer les piles The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94 9 EC and has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating
212. kwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 9 Table of Contents Notes 10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Studio 5000 Environment Preface This manual describes how to install configure and troubleshoot your ControlLogix digital I O modules There is also a complete listing of digital input and output modules including specifications and wiring diagrams You must be able to program and operate a ControlLogix controller to efficiently use your digital I O module The Studio 5000 Engineering and Design Environment combines engineering and design elements into a common environment The first element in the Studio 5000 environment is the Logix Designer application The Logix Designer application is the rebranding of RSLogix 5000 software and will continue to be the product to program Logix5000 controllers for discrete process batch motion safety and drive based solutions r Rockwell Software Studio 5000 4 Create AA Open Explore New Project Existing Project Help From Import Sample Project Release Notes rom Sample Project From Upload About Recent Projects 3 August 2012 B Sept Test Integrated Motion Co The Studio 5000 environment is the foundation for the future of Rockwell Automation engineering design tools and capabilities It is the one place for design engineers to develop all the elements of their control sy
213. l Diagnostics Scheduled Output Data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value The module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics Listen Only Full Diagnostics Output Data This format has the same definition as Full diagnostics output data except that it is a Listen only connection 1756 0A8D 1756 0B16D Scheduled Output Data per Point The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value 1756 0B161S only 1 The 1756 0B16lS module does not support the Rack optimization Listen only rack optimization and Scheduled output data communication formats Table 29 Output Module Connection Formats Connection Format Output Data Data Return Module Data Data The owner controller sends the module only output data 1756 OB16lEF 1756 OB16lEFS Scheduled Per Module The owner controller sends the module output data and a CIP Sync 1756 0B16IEF timestamp value Scheduled Per Point The owner controller sends output data and a CIP Sync timestamp 1756 OB16IEFS value to points configured for scheduling Listen Only None Establishes a Listen only connection with no data 1756 0B16IEF 1756 OB16lEFS Peer Input with Data Data with Peer Establishes a Listen only connection to input peer modules 1756 0B16IEF See the Peer Ownership Application Technique publication 1756 AT016 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2
214. le 22 lists the fault words and associated tags you can examine in program logic to indicate when a fault or event has occurred for a fast input module Table 22 Fault Words on Fast Input Modules Word Input Tag Name Description Module Fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital input modules Event Fault E Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital input modules that use the Data with Event or Listen Only with Event connection format All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 IB16IF module has a Module Fault word of 32 bits Table 23 Bits Set in Module Fault Word Condition Bits Set Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density The following illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix fast digital input modules Bit 31 Bit 0 Y Y A communication fault sets all 32 bits in the Module Fault word 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix fast digital output modules multicast fault and status data to any between Output Modules and Controllers Module Fault Word Fuse Blown Tag owner controller or listeni
215. le time is typically useful only when the On time is a result of a calculation e Clear the checkbox if you do not want to increase the duration of the pulse cycle In this case the output will not turn On if the On time is less than the minimum On time By default the checkbox is cleared and cycles will not extend CPt x PWMExtendCycle C PWM ExtendCycle Stagger Output to Adjust Cycle Phase to Minimize Simultaneous Outputs Check the checkbox to minimize the load on the power system by staggering output transitions See Figure 18 on page 102 By default this checkbox is cleared and staggering is disabled When staggering is disabled for an output point the output always turns On at the beginning of a pulse cycle CPt x PWMStaggerOutput CPWM StaggerOutput On Time in Seconds or On Time in Percent 104 To define PWM On time in seconds click On Time in Seconds To define PWM On time as a percentage of the cycle time click On Time in Percent By default the On time is defined in seconds C Pt x PWMOnTimelnPercent Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 C PWM OnTimelnPercent Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Field Description 1756 0B16IEF Tag Name 1756 0B16IEFS Tag Name Enable Cyde Limit Check the checkbox to allow only a fixed number of pulse cycles to occur CPt x PWMCydeLimitEnable CPWM CydeLimitEnable See Figure 15 on page 99 By default the Enable Cycle Lim
216. lse cycles continue to occur until the output turns Off default per Module 1 Allows only the number of pulse cycles defined via the Pt x PWMCycleLimit tag to or occur Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x PWMExecuteAllCycles BOOL Execute All PWM Cycles Determines whether to execute the number of cycles defined Connection Data via the Pt x PWMCycleLimit tag regardless of the output logic Requires PWM to be Output Data Data or Scheduled enabled via the Pt x PWMEnable tag and a cycle limit to be enabled via the per Module Pt x PWMCycleLimitEnable tag or 0 The output logic determines the number of cycles to produce default Connection Peer Ownership 1 The Pt x PWMCycleLimit tag determines the number of cycles to produce regardless B of output logic For example if you specify a cycle limit of 4 and the output turns Off after Outpit Data Data wie 3 cycles all 4 cycles will still occur despite the output being instructed to turn Off Pt x FaultValueStateDuration SINT Fault State Duration Defines the length of time that the output state remains in the Connection Data Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off The Fault mode stateis Output Data Data or Scheduled defined in the Pt x FaultValue tag per Module Valid values or e 0 Hold forever default Output remains in Fault mode for as long as the fault Connection Peer Ownership conditioni persists Output Dat
217. lt Peer connection is lost 6 Run Peer connection open and in Run mode Pt x Data BOOL Data lIndicates the current value to be sent to the corresponding output point IfPWMis Connection Data enabled this value will transition from 0 to 1 based on the PWM pulse train Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Off per Module 1 0n or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x Fault BOOL Fault Indicates whether 1 0 data for the corresponding point may be incorrect due toa Connection Data 198 fault 0 No fault 1 A fault exists and 1 0 data may be incorrect Any of these conditions will set the bit for this tag Pt x FuseBlown 1 e Pt x PWMCycleTime outside the valid range of 0 001 3600 0 seconds Pt x PWMOnTime outside the valid range of 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or0 100 percent Pt x PWMCycleTime lt Pt x PWMOnTime Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Table 48 1756 0B16IEF Module Input Data Tags continued Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Pt x FuseBlown BOOL Fuse Is Blown Indicates whether a fuse has blown due to a short or overload condition Connection Da
218. mber 2012 115 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules RTB Types There are three types of RTBs e Cage Clamp catalog number 1756 TBCH e NEMA Clamp catalog number 1756 TBNH e Spring Clamp catalog number 1756 TBSH or TBS6H Each RIP comes with housing Wire the RTB with a 3 2 mm 1 8 in maximum screwdriver before installing it onto the module Cage Clamp Follow these steps to wire a cage clamp 1 Strip 9 5 mm 3 8 in maximum length of wire 2 Insert the wire into the open terminal on the side 3 Turn the screw clockwise to close the terminal on the wire ud Strain Relief Area 20859 M The open section at the bottom of the RTB is called the strain relief area The wiring from the connections can be grouped with a plastic tie 116 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 NEMA Clamp Follow these steps to wire a NEMA clamp 1 Strip 8 mm 5 16 in maximum length of wire 2 Turn the terminal screw counterclockwise 3 Insert the stripped end of the wire under the plate on the terminal CAL KD Ep ep leo ED KD D KD KD CN a Strain Relief Area EB S JS a f e
219. me equal to the time that the input changed state plus the Delay time The final COP instruction updates LastInputTimestamp in preparation for the next change of state e Rung 4 is the standard XIC OTE rung that controls the output point based on the input point The only difference is that the output module is configured for scheduled outputs The outputs will not get applied until the scheduled time has occurred Local 2 I Pt 0 Data Local 4 0 Pt 0 Data The Controller Tags dialog box below shows examples of the tags created in ladder logic Controller Tags ModuleScheduleUserManual controller Read Wie AB 1756 IBTBIF I O Read wiite B 1756 IBTEIF O 0 li Read Wite ABI756OBISEFCO Read wite AB 1756_OB16IEF 1 0 Read Write AB 1756 OBIGIEF Scheduled 0 0 Read wiite Read witite 4 226 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C Reset a Fuse Perform Pulse Test and Reset Latched Diagnostics The following ladder logic program shows how to use ladder logic to reset an electronic fuse for a faulted point perform a pulse test and to reset latched diaganostics MainProgiam MainRoutine B x Local 4 Fusedlown t M58 4 Tine CIP Genetic IN Message Contial Slotd_BO_fure_reset E mm A ERS MS p_i Type CIP Genetic Lan Me
220. mestamps BOOL Latch Timestamps Latches a CIP Sync timestamp for a COS transition Connection Data e When an initial timestamp is latched timestamps for subsequent COS transitions are Input Data Data or Timestamp Data dropped or Oncea latched timestamp is acknowledged via the corresponding bit in the nen Pt x NewDataOffOnAck or Pt x NewDataOnOffAck tag the timestamp is overridden Connertion Data yian Event upon the next COS transition Input Data Timestamp Data Requires COS to be enabled via the Pt x COSOffOnEn or Pt x COSOnOff tags For more information see page 87 0 Timestamps are overridden with each successive COS transition 1 Timestamps are latched until acknowledged FilterOffOn INT Filter Time Off to On Defines how long an Off to On input transition must remain inthe Connection Data On state before the module considers the transition valid For more information see page 90 Input Data Data or Timestamp Data Valid filter time 0 30 000 us or Connection Data with Event Input Data Timestamp Data FilterOnOff INT Filter Time On to Off Defines how long an On to Off input transition must remain inthe Connection Data Off state before the module considers the transition valid For more information see page 90 Input Data Data or Timestamp Data Valid filter time 0 30 000 us or Connection Data with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x FilterEn BOOL Filter lf enabled for a point input transitio
221. mode if a communication failure occurs 1 Outputs go to FaultMode if a communication failure occurs Table 41 Diagnostic Output Module Input Data Tags Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input data including fusing see BlownFuse 8 bytes NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away Data DINT Output Echo Status Off On status for the output point echoed back from the output module This is used to verify 1 bit per point proper communication only No field side verification is done For field side verification see OutputVerifyFault 0 0ff 1 0n Fault DINT Fault Status Indicates whether a point is faulted Faulted 1 0 data for that point may be incorrect Check other 1 bit per point diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost or inhibited then all points for the module will be faulted by the processor 0 No fault 1 Fault FuseBlown NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss or CommFault FieldPwrLoss DINT Field Power Loss AC output diagnostic detects that field power has failed or is disconnected from the module No Load 1 bit per point also is detected 0 No fault 1 Fault FuseBlown DINT Fuse Is Blown An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short circuit condition for an out
222. modules that can verify output circuit functionality without actually changing the state of the output load device A short pulse is sent to the targeted output circuit The circuit should respond as it would if a real change of state command was issued but the load device does not transition See page 227 in Appendix C for instructions on performing a pulse test with a CIP Generic Message instruction TIP Consider the following when using the pulse test e Only use the test when the output state does not transition for long periods of time Normal diagnostics will catch faults if the outputs are transitioning regularly e When first performing the pulse test verify that the load will not transition You should be at the actual load while the test is performed The table explains how a pulse test can be used to perform a preemptive diagnosis of possible future module conditions Objective Pulse Test Description Detect a blown fuse before it The Blown Fuse diagnostic can be used only when an output module is in the On happens state However you can use a pulse test when an output module is in an Off state to determine whether operating conditions may cause a blown fuse When you perform a pulse test on a module in the Off state the output point is commanded to be On briefly Although no diagnostic bits are set in the output data echo the pulse test reports a failure if the conditions when the point is On indicate a blown fuse
223. more information about fault tags see Appendix B These modules use electronic fusing e 1756 OA8E e 1756 OB8EI e 1756 OA8D e 1756 OB16D e 1756 OB16E e 1756 OVI6E e 1756 OV32E e 1756 OBIGIEF e 1756 OBIGIEFS Refer to Table 3 to determine what fuse to use in your application If your module does not support fusing you can use a fused IFM to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 Table 3 Recommended Fuses Recommended Fuse Fuse Supplier SAN O Industry Corp SOC p n MT 4 6 3A Circuit Type Fusing on the module None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm 6 3A Medium lag 1756 0A8 1756 0AgD 9 1756 OA8E 9 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1756 0160 4 Yes Fused on a per group basis 5x20mm Littelfuse p n 3 15A Slo Blow H2153 15 1500A Interruption current 1756 04161 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p n 1756 ON8 6 3A Medium lag MT 4 6 3A Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 57 Chapter3 Common Module Features Table 3 Recommended Fuses continued Circuit Type Fusing on the module Recommended Fuse Fuse Supplier 1756 088 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p n 1756 0881 4A Quick acting MQ2 4A 1756 0B8EI 9 Yes Fused on a per point basis
224. multicast back out onto the network This is called output data echo IMPORTANT inthis Producer Consumer model the output module is the consumer of the controller s output data and the producer of the data echo The owner controller updates ControlLogix digital output modules in the local chassis at the end of every task and at the RPI When you specify an RPI value for a digital output module you instruct the owner controller when to broadcast the output data to the module If the module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller as shown in the illustration below the module receives the data almost immediately after the owner controller sends it Backplane transfer times are small 8 Figure 4 Local Output Modules o r3 rn Ei L3 LI LI _ Datais sent at the end of c H every task and at the RPI e lo J G 40949 Depending on the value of the RPI with respect to the length of the program scan the output module can receive and echo data multiple times during one program scan Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 31 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Output Modules in a Remote Chassis Local Chassis If an output module physically resides in a chassis other than that of the owner con
225. n Module Features Chapter 3 Software Configurable Filter Times On to Off and Off to On filter times can be adjusted through RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix input modules These filters improve noise immunity within a signal A larger filter value affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules IMPORTANT _ Input filters on the 1756 IB16IF module function differently than other digital 1 0 modules For information about input filters on the 1756 IB16IF module see page 90 Follow these steps to configure the input filter time 1 On the right side of the Configuration tab choose the input filter times from the Off gt On and On gt Off pull down menus E Module Properties Local 1 1756 IA16 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Input Filter Time Off gt On On gt Off 0 7 ims r y 9ms yams gt Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Click OK Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Input Modules ControlLogix input modules provide isolated or nonisolated wiring options Some applications require power for the I O circuits to originate on separate isolated power sources Because these conditions require separate commons for each channel some input modules use individual isolation or point to point isolation so if one point faults the others continue to operate Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix input modules are channel
226. n to the module to be disrupted and may result in a loss of data Compatible Keying Compatible Keying indicates that the module determines whether to accept or reject communication Different module families communication adapters and module types implement the compatibility check differently based on the family capabilities and on prior knowledge of compatible products Compatible Keying is the default setting Compatible Keying allows the physical module to accept the key of the module configured in the software provided that the configured module is one the physical module is capable of emulating The exact level of emulation required is product and revision specific With Compatible Keying you can replace a module of a certain Major Revision with one of the same catalog number and the same or later that is higher Major Revision In some cases the selection makes it possible to use a replacement that is a different catalog number than the original For example you can replace a 1756 CNBR module with a 1756 CN2R module Release notes for individual modules indicate the specific compatibility details Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 When a module is created the module developers consider the module s development history to implement capabilities that emulate those of the previous module However the developers cannot know future developments Because of this w
227. nals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1492 IMF40F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC blown fuse indicators 1492 IMF40F FS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IMF40F FS240 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1 This IFM is not recommended for use with 1 0 modules that have an off state leakage current exceeding 0 5 mA Use a 1492 IFM20D120N or 1492 IFM20D120A 2 module for inputs Use a 1492 IFM20D120 2 module for outputs 2 The 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 module and the 1492 CABLExY cable can be used with the 1756 IB16D module However due to the 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 module s blown fuse leakage current rating the wire off diagnostic function of the 1756 IB16D module will not indicate a blown or removed fuse as a wire off condition If you require this diagnostic to function for a blown or removed fuse you must use a 1492 IFM40F F24AD 4 module 3 Expandable to 16 by using a XIM120 BR or XIMF 24 2 module 4 Can have up to 1 expandable module depending upon master used total 16 pts or less Extender cable is provided 5 IFMs status indicator provides output On Off indication Due to the magnitude of current through the status indicator the 1756 0B16D module no load diagnostic function will not work If this function is required use the 1492 IFM40F 2 module 6 The 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 and
228. name an 1 0 module during initial module configuration to choose a path for your message instruction Click OK to set the path Message Configuration Slot4_ChO_Reset_Fuse Configuration Communication Tag Path Slota_OABD Browse Slot4_OASD Communication EIL ETTE VETUS eae Slot4 DASD Slot4 DA8D C Connected GW 10 Configuration 2 489 1756 Backplane 1756 410 BA 11 1756 HSC B HSC Module Ph 4 1756 0A8D Slot4_0A8D O Enabe OE fa 8 1756 L63 L63 New Controller Error Cor Error Path Error Text Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 221 Appendix C 222 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs for Standard and Diagnostic 1 0 Modules This section demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs for standard and diagnostic digital I O modules The Change of State timestamp can be used to synchronize the output turning On or Off based on the time that the input transitions The program can be extended to include synchronizing multiple output modules by sending the same timestamp to all output modules In the example below the output follows the state of input 0 but it is delayed by exactly 10 ms The advantage of using CST over timers is that the synchronization is performed at the I O module which eliminates any jitter due to controller or communicati
229. ndix G Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 132 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 1756 0A8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLEXW x cable length 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs gth 1492 IFM20F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Isolated with four terminals with 120V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS240 4 Isolated with four terminals with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1756 0A8D 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLExV x cable length 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Is
230. nductor on any single terminal When using the 1756 TBNH do not wire more than two 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG conductors on any single terminal Use only the same size wires with no intermixing of solid and stranded wire types When using the 1756 TBSH do not wire more than 1 conductor on any single terminal To see a listing of the IFMs available for use with the ControlLogix analog I O modules see Appendix G This chapter explains the general guidelines for wiring your digital I O modules including grounding the cable and connecting the wires to each RTB type The following table shows each module catalog number and the corresponding page with the wiring diagram Cat No Page Cat No Page 1756 IA8D 139 1756 0A161 157 1756 1A16 139 1756 0B8 158 1756 IA16l 140 1756 OB8EI 159 1756 1432 141 1756 0B8l 160 1756 IB16 142 1756 0B16D 161 1756 IB16D 143 1756 0B16E 162 1756 1161 144 1756 0B16l 163 1756 IB16IF 145 1756 0B16IEF 164 1756 1B32 146 1756 165 1756 IC16 147 1756 0B161S 166 1756 1816 148 1756 0B32 167 1756 IH16l 149 1756 0C8 168 1756 IM16l 150 1756 0616 169 1756 IN16 150 1756 0H81 170 1756 IV16 151 1756 0N8 171 1756 IV32 152 1756 0V16E 172 1756 048 153 1756 0V32E 173 1756 0A8D 154 1756 0W16l 174 1756 OA8E 155 1756 0X8l 175 1756 0416 156 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P Nove
231. ng controller Like input modules output modules maintain a Module Fault word the highest level of fault reporting However output modules use an additional word to indicate a fault condition Table 24 lists the fault word and the associated tag you can examine in program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a fast output module Table 24 Fault Words on Fast Output Modules Word InputTagName Description Module Fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital output modules All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OB16IEF module has a Module Fault word of 32 bits But because the module is a 16 point module only the first 16 bits 0 15 are used in the Module Fault word Bits set in the FuseBlown tag are logically entered into the Module Fault word Depending on the module type a bit set in the Module Fault word can mean multiple things as indicated in the table Table 25 Bits Set in Module Fault Word Condition Bit set Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Fuse blown Only the bit affected is set to 1 The following illustration provides an overview of the fault reporting process for digital output modules Bit 31 Bit 0 Y lt
232. nk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Supersedes Publication 1756 UM058F EN P April 2012 Copyright 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
233. nput for 10x the duration of the filter time Within that time period the input never remains On for at least 2 ms The module considers the transition invalid and drops the data timestamped at the original transition Figure 11 on page 91 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Figure 9 Valid Transition with No Bounce eee Input remains On for at least 2 ms The transition is considered valid and the timestamp is sent to the controller Input turns On anda timestamp is recorded Time in milliseconds Figure 10 Transition Valid with Bounce Input turns On and remains On for at least 2 ms in the 20 ms time period that is 10x the input filter time The module sends the timestamp recorded at the original transition point time 0 to the controller Input turns Off before 2 ms elapses Input turns On anda timestamp is recorded Time in milliseconds Figure 11 Invalid Transition ee ad After the 20 ms time period that is 10x the input filter Input turns Off before 2 ms elapses time the module drops the data recorded at the original transition If an RPI occurs during this time the module sends the controller its current valid input Input turns On anda data The data that is sent does not include data from 8 timestamp is recorded the transition because the input transition has not cleared the filter and been recognized as a valid inpu
234. nput modules in remote chassis 28 output modules in remote chassis 32 rack connection 24 tip on conserving bandwidth 28 coordinated system time CST 47 222 create event tags for fast module 94 new module 129 Index CST Timestamped Data communication format 132 CST Timestamped Fuse Data communication format 133 data exchange peer ownership 84 producer consumer model 13 31 data structure array 211 flat 211 Data with Event connection format 94 106 diagnostic features 67 82 latching 61 68 direct connection 24 disable change of state 52 89 diagnostic latching 61 diagnostics for field power loss 60 filtering 92 keying 44 module communication 46 timestamp latching 89 timestamps 89 dynamic reconfiguration 134 E edit configuration 134 electonic fusing 57 electronic keying 40 electrostatic discharge 111 enable change of state 52 89 diagnostic latching 61 diagnostics for field power loss 60 filtering 92 timestamp latching 89 timestamps 89 event task trigger 28 93 94 extended depth housing 120 F fast 1 0 module array data structure 211 CIP Sync time 48 224 event task trigger 93 94 fault and status reporting 106 107 input module compatibility 83 output module compatibility 84 per point timestamping 87 89 programmable fault state delay 95 pulse capture 86 pulse width modulation 97 105 response time 85 software configurable filter times 90 92 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P
235. ns must remain in the new state for a Connection Data configured length of time before the module considers the transition valid For more Input Data Data or Timestamp Data information see page 90 or Filtering i disabled Connection Data with Event 1 Filtering is enabled Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x COSOffOnEn BOOL Change of State Off to On If enabled for a point an Off to On transition triggers a Connection Data timestamp recording and sends a COS message on the backplane For more information see Input Data Data or Timestamp Data page 52 Ur 0 COS data is not produced upon an Off to On transition Connection Data with Event 1 C0S data is produced upon an Off to On transition Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x COSOnOffEn BOOL Change of State On to Off If enabled for a point an On to Off transition triggers a Connection Data timestamp recording and sends a COS message on the backplane For more information see page 52 0 COS data is not produced upon an On to Off transition 1 C0S data is produced upon an On to Off transition Table 44 1756 IB16IF Module Input Tags Input Data Data or Timestamp Data or Connection Data with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Fault DINT Fault Status Indicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the input Connection Data or Listen Only module is lost then all 32 bit
236. nsures that output devices that require a minimum time to turn On or that cannot react to a short pulse cycle can react with any given PWM On time calculation rather than not turning On To ensure the output device turns On when the calculated On time is less than the minimum On time you must enable the Extend Cycle option When Extend Cycle is enabled the cycle time is extended proportionately up to 10 times the calculated On time while taking into account the minimum On time EXAMPLE A solenoid requires at least 40 ms to turn On During configuration you enable the output for PWM specify a minimum On time of 40 ms and enable the Extend Cycle option If the calculated On time in the PWMOnTime output tag drops below the 40 ms minimum On time the module automatically extends the On time to 40 ms and proportionally extends the cycle time in the PWMCycleTime output tag If the On time drops below 4 ms the output will turn Off because the cycle cannot extend beyond 10 times the 40 ms On time If Extend Cycle is not enabled and the calculated On time is less than the minimum On time the output of the module will not energize e Stagger Output Mitigates the power surge from outputs that drive high power loads by preventing the outputs from turning On simultaneously Enabling the Stagger Output option for multiple output points addresses surges by staggering the leading edge of those outputs Figure 18 When the Stagger Output feature i
237. o 2000 m 6562 ft without derating This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and may not provide adequate protection to radio communication services in such environments This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA or be approved for the application if nonmetallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications In addition to this publication see the following e Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional installation requirements e NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 109 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules North American Hazardous Location Approval The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locat
238. ocal controller to generate timestamps To use diagnostic timestamps you must choose the appropriate communication format during initial configuration For more information see To configure features specific to fast modules see Chapter 5 on page 134 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 69 Chapter4 Diagnostic Module Features Table 9 1756 0A8D Point level Fault Scenarios Ladder commands output to be On 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off 2 Fuse Blown bit is set 8 Point AC 16 Point DC Diagnostic I O modules provide various grouping of points on different modules The eight point AC modules and 16 point DC modules provide additional flexibility when designing module applications The greater number of points allows for more field devices to be attached to I O modules to boost efficiency Point level Fault Reporting Diagnostic I O modules set bits to indicate when a fault has occurred on a point by point basis The following fault conditions generate their own unique fault bits Table 8 Unique Fault Bits for 1 0 Points Input Points These conditions can set a fault bit for an input point Open wire Field power loss 1756 IA8D only Output Points These conditions can set a fault bit for an output point Fuse blown Noload e Output verify Field power loss 1756 IA8D only Using these bits in tandem with data echo and manually performing a
239. ockID DINT Grandmaster Clock ID Indicates the ID of the CIP Sync Grandmaster to which the Connection Data module is synced Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Timestamp DINT Timestamp A 64 bit CIP Sync timestamp of the last new output data or FuseBlown Connection Data 200 event Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Table 49 1756 0B16IEF Module Output Data Tags Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition Type Pt x Data BOOL Data Indicates the On Off state to apply to the output point Connection Data 0 0ff Output Data Data or Scheduled 1 0n per Module or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x ResetFuseBlown BOOL Reset Blown Fuse Attempts to clear a blown fuse status and apply output data when Connection Data the bit transitions from Off to On Output Data Data or Scheduled per Module or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverrideOutputEn BOOL Override Output Overrides local output data for peer logic with the value defined in Connection Peer Ownership the Pt x OverrideOutputValue tag Out
240. odule Before creating a new module make sure you complete these procedures in RSLogix 5000 software e Create a controller project e Ifyou plan to add the I O module to a remote chassis add ControlNet or EtherNet IP communication modules to both the local and remote chassis in the I O Configuration tree For more information on ControlLogix ControlNet modules see ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems publication_ CNET UM001 For more information on ControlLogix EtherNet IP modules see EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UMO001 IMPORTANT RSLogix 5000 software version 15 02 00 and later or Studio 5000 environment version 21 00 00 and later lets you add 1 0 modules online When using a previous version you must be offline to create a new module Follow these steps to add a local or remote I O module 1 Toaddan I O module to a local chassis right click the I O Configuration folder and choose New Module or To add an I O module to a remote chassis right click the remote communication module and choose New Module 2 On the Select Module Type dialog box select the digital module to create and then click Create Selec Module Type AkO Mode Dscovemy Favorie Hide Fier Module Type Category Filter Modde Type Vendor Fer e v Ales Commurecabon Conbcler Ovis i Li B Li yy Catalog Number Description 1755416 16 Para 79 130N AL Ingu
241. odule is lost then all points for the module will be faulted 0 No fault 1 Fault FuseBlown NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss or CommFault FuseBlown DINT Fuse Is Blown An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short or overload condition for an output point All 1 bit per point FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the user 0 No fault 1 Fault Table 39 Standard Output Module Output Data Tags Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with scheduled outputs and coordinated system time 8 bytes CST Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time CST timestamp at which the output module is to apply its outputs Data DINT Output Status On Off status of the output point originating from the controller 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 0n Table 40 Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags Name Data Type Definition FaultLatchEn DINT Latch Fault lf enabled for a point any NoLoad OutputVerifyFault or FieldPwrLoss stays latched in the faulted state 1bit per point even if the fault no longer exists until the user clears the fault This does not affect FuseBlown it is always latched 0 Disable 1 Enable latching FaultMode DINT Fault Mode Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs 1bit per point See FaultValu
242. og Number 1756 1A16 Come Femme roa nn Major Revision 2 Minor Revision 1 d tea Ector Leg Cutie Law Ca cw e Communication is allowed Physical Module Vendor Allen Bradley Product Type Digital Input Module Catalog Number 1756 1B16 Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 45 Chapter 3 46 Common Module Features IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the 1 0 communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a loss of data Module Inhibiting Module inhibiting lets you indefinitely suspend a connection between an owner controller and a digital I O module without having to remove the module from the configuration This process lets you temporarily disable communication to a module such as to perform maintenance You can use module inhibiting in these ways e You write a configuration for an I O module but inhibit the module to prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the owner does not establish a connection and the configuration is not sent to the module until the connection is uninhibited In your application a controller already owns a module has downloaded the configuration to the module and is currently exchanging data over the connection between the devices In this case you can inhibit the module and the owner controller behaves as if th
243. oints that are enabled for COS and timestamping 5 Ifyou checked the Latch Timestamps checkbox use program logic or the RSLogix 5000 tag editor to acknowledge transitions and clear latched timestamps via the Pt x NewDataOffOnAck and Pt x NewDataOnOffAck output tags For more information about module tags refer to Appendix B Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 89 Chapter 5 90 Fast Module Features Software Configurable Filter Times To account for hard contact bounce you can configure Off to On and On to Off input filter times of 0 30 000 us in RSLogix 5000 software These filters define how long an input transition must remain in the new state before the module considers the transition valid When an input transition occurs the module timestamps the transition on the edge of the transition and stores timestamp data for the transition The module then monitors the input for the duration of the filter time to verify that the input remains in the new state e Ifthe input remains in the new state for a time period equal to the filter time the input is recognized and recorded The module sends timestamp data for the transition and the input s On Off state to the controller e Ifthe input changes state again before the duration of the filter time has elapsed the module continues to scan that input for up to 10x the filter time During this continued scan period one of th
244. olated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 3 1492 IFM20F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Isolated with four terminals per output and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0A8E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D5120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLEXV 1492 IFM20F FS 2 1492 IFM20F FS120 2 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators Isolated with four terminals per output and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 x cable length 243 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 0416 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard ERU ERU 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D120N Status indicating Narrow standard with 120V AC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120 2 120V AC DC stat
245. on delays Your control becomes much more deterministic even under changing loads For this synchronization to work properly the 10 ms delay must be long enough to account for any controller backplane and network delays The input and output modules must reside in the same rack as a Time Master controller Timestamp units are microseconds The following illustrations show the ladder instructions the program uses The rungs perform these tasks e Rungs 0 and 1 detect the transition from Program to Run mode This is used to turn On init which causes the program to initialize its tags e Rung 2 only executes once and initializes the LastTimestamp LastTimestamp is used to detect a Change of State on the input point by checking to see if the timestamp of the input data has changed always_on init 0 Ye always_on 1 init ov 2 Move Source Time at which Input Changed 991817889 Dest LastTimestamp 991817889 ov Move Source Time at which Input Changed 1 7 Dest LastTimestamp1 7 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C e Rung3isthe main rung that checks for Change of State on the input point by comparing the current input timestamp Time at which Input Changed with the last timestamp LastTimestamp cc HEH A 3 Not Equal Add Source A Time al which Input Changed 0 Sour
246. on dialog box E Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB16IF 1 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration orton Ej onor rie E S STIS STIS IIS IS IS T IS STIS ESTIS SO ESOS ST S T ST EST ST S I IS a Enable COS Timestamp Enable Input Filter Time us C Latch Timestamps OoOoooooooooooo000 Status Offline 4 Complete the fields as described in the table below and click OK Field Description Configuration Tag Enable COS Timestamps To enable COS and timestamping for an Off to On transition fora Pt x COSOffOnEn Off On point check the corresponding checkbox To disable COS and timestamping for an Off to On transition for a point clear the corresponding checkbox Enable COS Timestamps To enable COS and timestamping for an On to Off transition fora Pt x COSOnOffEn On Off point check the corresponding checkbox To disable COS and timestamping for an On to Off transition for a point clear the corresponding checkbox Latch Timestamps Check the checkbox to latch a CIP Sync timestamp for a COS LatchTimestamps transition e When an initial timestamp is latched timestamps for subsequent COS transitions are dropped e Oncea latched timestamp is acknowledged via the corresponding bit in the Pt x NewDataOffOnAck or Pt x NewDataOnOffAck tag the timestamp is overridden upon the next COS transition IMPORTANT Timestamps are latched only for p
247. on the Service Type that you choose All values are in Hex Object Type Class Object that you are sending a message to such as the device object or a discrete output point Object ID Instance Each object can have multiple instances For example a discrete output can have 16 points or instances of where a message can be sent This specifies the instance Object Attribute Attribute Further identifies the exact address for the message An analog input can have multiple alarms so this attribute acknowledges a specific alarm and not the other alarms If an attribute is not specified default to 0 the Service applies to all attributes of the Class Instance 218 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The following table contains code information that is necessary only if you are configuring the message with RSLogix 5000 software version 9 00 00 or earlier Table 57 Module Services and Configuration Information Required for RSLogix 5000 Software Version 9 00 00 or Earlier Retrieve CST Retrieve Device Reset the Module Reset Latched Reset ElectronicFuse Pulse Test Information Information WHO Diagnostics Service Code 1 1 5 4b 4d 4c Object Type 7 1 1 1d Input modules le le 1e Output modules Object ID 1 1 1 1 1 1 Object Attribute N A N A N A N A N A N A Source N A N A N A Enable 32 Poin
248. ontrolLogix digital output modules multicast fault and status data to any owner controller or listening controller Like input modules output modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting However some output modules use additional words to indicate fault conditions The table lists the fault words and the associated tags that can be examined in program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard output module Table 6 Fault Words on Output Modules Word Tag Name Description Module fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting Available on all digital output modules Fuse blown FuseBlown Indicates a point group fuse blown on the module Available only on 1756 0A16 1756 OA8D 1756 0A8E 1756 0B16D 1756 0B16E 1756 0B16EIF 1756 0B8EI 1756 OV16E and 1756 0V32E modules For more information see Electronic Fusing on page 57 Field power loss FieldPwrLoss Indicates a loss of field power to a point on the module Available on the 1756 0A8E module only For more information see Field Power Loss Detection on page 60 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each modules density are used For example the 1756 OB8 module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because this is a eight point module only the first eight bits 0 7 are used in the module fault word Fault bits in the fuse blown word and field power loss word are logically entered in
249. ormat the following occurs e A second connection dedicated to event data only is established with the module This dedicated event connection reduces controller overhead when using inputs or input patterns to trigger event tasks in the controller e Anew set of event tags is created as described in Table 46 on page 193 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Features Specific to The table below lists features specific to ControlLogix fast digital output Fast Output Modules modus Topic Page Programmable Fault State Delays 95 Pulse Width Modulation 97 Peer 1 0 Control 1756 OB16IEF only See the Peer 1 0 Control Application Technique publication 1756 AT016 IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 software version 18 02 00 and 19 01 00 output tag information is sent to the 1756 OB16IEF module only at the RPI rate defined during configuration For optimal performance use an Immediate Output IOT instruction For example the rung shown below contains an IOT instruction for a fast output module in slot 3 Add a similar rung to your last routine within the Main Task to mimic normal output tag processing OT Immediate Output Update Tag Local 3 0 Programmable Fault State Delays You can define the following states for an output point that is in Fault mode due to a communication failure e Duration Defines the length of time that the output remains in the Fault mode
250. ors 1756 0N8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLExW x cable length 1492 IFM20F FS2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for output 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals per output and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0V16E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 246 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D24 1492 IFM20D24 2 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F2 1492 IFM20F F24 2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals ene 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra terminals
251. ot yet been reached The bit resets to 0 each time the output or transitions to On to begin a new PWM cycle Connection Listen Only 1 The PWM cycle limit has been reached Output Data None Pt x CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid lndicates whether the module has synchronized to a valid CIP Sync Connection Data time master on the backplane Output Data Data 0 CIP Sync is not available or 1 CIP Sync is available Connection Listen Only Output Data None Pt x CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout Indicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has timed Connection Data out Output Data Data 0 A valid time master has not timed out or 1 A valid time master was detected on the backplane but the time master has timed Connection Listen Only out The module is currently using its local clock Output Data None LocalClockOffset DINT Local Clock Timestamp lIndicates the offset between the current CST and the CIP Sync Connection Data 208 value when a valid CIP Sync time is available Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Data or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Table 53 1756 0B16IEFS Module Input Data Tags Data Output or Listen Only Connections continued Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition OffsetTimestamp DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates when the CIP Sync LocalClockOffset and GrandMasterl
252. p to group or channel to channel wiring isolation Your specific application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use IMPORTANT Although some ControlLogix diagnostic 1 0 modules provide nonisolated field side wiring options each 1 0 module maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side and field side No Load Detection For each output point no load detection senses the absence of field wiring or a missing load from each output point in the Off state only The output circuit on a diagnostic output module has a current sensing optoisolator used in parallel with the output transistor Current flows through this sensing circuit only when the output is Off as shown in the simplified diagram V Current Sense Current Flow with Output Current Flow with Output On Transistor Output Off 41681 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 75 Chapter 4 76 Diagnostic Module Features Diagnostic output modules list a minimum load current specification 1756 OA8D 10 mA amp 1756 OB16D 3 mA In the On state the module must be connected to a load that will draw a minimum current equal to these values Ifa connected load is sized in accordance with the minimum load current specification diagnostic output modules are capable of sensing current through the optoisolator and the load when the output point is Off Follow these steps to enable no lo
253. peration when a controller sends out an output command to the ControlLogix system the output module that is targeted for that command returns the commanded state of the output to the system This process verifies that the module has received the command and will try to execute it Other devices can use this broadcast signal through a Listen only connection to determine the desired state of the output without having to interrogate the owner controller Monitor Fault Bits The output data echo only matches the commanded state of the outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions If there is an anomaly with the module the commanded state and the output data echo may not match You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions Ifa fault occurs the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition In this case the output data echo may not match the commanded state of the outputs If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the output data echo check your output module for the following conditions e Communication fault e Connection is inhibited e Blown fuse The module will not turn on an output if an overload or short circuit is detected e 1756 OA8D and 1756 OASE only Loss of field power The module will not turn on an output unless AC power is detected Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Output Modules As with input modules ControlLogix output mod
254. ported to the controller See Module Inhibiting in Chapter 3 for more information Major fault On Controller If Check the box to create a major fault if there is a connection failure with the Connection Fails While in Run Mode module while in Run mode For important information on this checkbox see the Logix5000 Controllers Information and Status Programming Manual publication 1756 PM015 Module Fault The fault box is empty if you are offline The type of connection fault appears in the text box if a fault occurs when the module is online Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 135 Chapter7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules View and Change Module Tags When you create a module a set of tags is created by the ControlLogix system that can be viewed in the Tag Editor of RSLogix 5000 software Each configured feature on your module has a unique ta that can be used in the controller s y q 8 program logic Follow these steps to access a module s tags 1 On the Controller Organizer expand the Controller folder right click Controller Tags and choose Monitor Tags fe RSLogix 5000 Digital Test 1756 174 20 1 File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hi Bake 5m J Offline f m RUN No Forces b ao No Edits a nergy Storage 5 F po 5 38 Controller Organizer SJ Controller Digital Test Controller Tags C Controller Fault A Mew Tag Ctri w
255. pulse test can help to further isolate the fault Table 9 lists possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OA8D module No Ladder commands output to be Off Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as oft 9 Pulse Test fails Possible cause of fault Output is shorted to L2 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off No Load or output is shorted to L1 2 Pulse Test fails 2 No Load bit is off 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off L1 or L2 are disconnected or outside the 47 63 Hz 2 No Load shows a fault 2 No Load bit is set frequency range 3 Field Power Loss shows a fault 3 Field Power Loss is set 4 Pulse Test fails 4 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On 2 Output Verify bit is set The output cannot turn On due to hardware point damage 70 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1 2 Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off Pulse Test fails When pulse test is executed it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display Hardware point damage Itis not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the Off state If a short circuit occurs the output point is turned Off and the fault appears in the Off state until the point is re
256. put Data Data with Peer 0 Disable 1 Enable Pt x OverrideOutputValue BOOL Override Output Value Indicates the On Off status to apply to all outputs mapped to Connection Peer Ownership the output point when the corresponding bit in the Pt x OverrideOutputEn tag is set Output Data Data with Peer 0 Off 1 0n Pt x OverridePeerlnputEn BOOL Override Peer Input Overrides peer input data mapped to the output point with the Connection Peer Ownership value defined in the Pt x OverridePeerlnputValue output tag Output Data Data with Peer 0 Disable 1 Enable Pt x OverridePeerInputValue BOOL Override Peer Input Value Indicates the On Off status to apply to all peer inputs Connection Peer Ownership mapped to the output point when the corresponding bit in the Pt x OverridePeerlnputEn Output Data Data with Peer output tag is enabled 0 Off 1 0n Pt x OverridePeerWindow0En BOOL Override Peer Window 0 Overrides peer window 0 inputs mapped to the output point Connection Peer Ownership with the value defined in the Pt x OverridePeerWindow0Value output tag Output Data Data with Peer 0 Disable 1 Enable Pt x OverridePeerWindow0Value BOOL Override Peer Window 0 Value Indicates the On Off status to apply to peer window 0 Connection Peer Ownership inputs mapped to the output point when the corresponding bit in the Output Data Data with Peer Pt x OverridePeerWindow0En output tag is enabled 0 Off 1 0n
257. put point All 1 bit per point FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the user 0 No fault 1 Fault NoLoad DINT No Load Diagnostic that indicates the absence of a load such as the wire is disconnected from the module This 1 bit per group diagnostic operates only in the Off state 0 No fault 1 Fault OutputVerifyFault DINT Output Verify Diagnostic that indicates that the input has been commanded to the On state but the output has not 1 bit per point been verified to be On 0 No fault 1 Fault output is not On Table 42 Diagnostic Output Module Output Data Tags Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with scheduled outputs and coordinated system time 8 bytes CST Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time CST timestamp at which the output module is to apply its outputs Data DINT Output Status Status for the output point originating from the controller 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 0n 188 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Tag Definitions Appendix B Fast Input Module Tags The ControlLogix 1756 IB16IF fast input module has four types of tags e Configuration Structure of data sent from the controller to the I O module upon powerup e Input Structure of data continually sent from the I O module to the controller or a listening peer module containing the current
258. put point on the module records timestamps in CIP Sync format at these speeds e 4us for inputs lt 4 kHz e 13 us for inputs gt 4 kHz IMPORTANT __ Timestamping functions only in a CIP Sync system If you are using change of state COS in a system using Coordinated System Time CST all timestamp values and the GrandMasterClockID input tag are set to zero To set up CIP Sync time synchronization on the local controller use the Date Time tab in the controller properties For more information about CIP Sync configuration refer to the Integrated Architecture and CIP Sync Configuration Application Technique publication A AT003 You can configure an input point to record a timestamp when the point transitions from On to Off Off to On or in both directions By default all points are configured to record a timestamp in both directions You can also configure the module to latch timestamps for an input point s last transition When latching is enabled for a specific point the point records a timestamp in the Pt x Timestamp OffOn or Pt x Timestamp OnOff input tags The timestamp remains latched and no new timestamps are recorded for the input point until the timestamp is acknowledged and reset As a result you can use the timestamp to determine the speed of a transition that is too fast to be detected by the program scan To acknowledge a transition and reset a timestamp latch you set the corresponding bit in these output
259. r Fault Indicates whether input data for a faulted point is correct Connection Data or Listen Only or incorrect Input Data Data or Timestamp Data 0 No fault or 1 Fault Connection Data with Event or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x NewDataOffOn BOOL New Data Off to On Captures short duration pulses for Off to On transitions A Connection Data or Listen Only captured pulse remains latched until acknowledged via the Pt x NewDataOffOnAck Input Data Data or Timestamp Data output tag For more information see page 86 of 0 No new Off to On transitions have occurred since the last acknowledgement Connection Data with Event or Listen 1 A new Off to On transition has occurred but has not yet been acknowledged Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x NewDataOnOff BOOL New Data On to Off Captures short duration pulses for On to Off transitions A pulse Connection Data or Listen Only remains latched until acknowledged via the Pt x NewDataOnOffAck output tag For more Input Data Data or Timestamp Data information see page 86 or 0 No new On to Off transitions have occurred since the last acknowledgement Connection Data with Event or Listen 1 A new On to Off transition has occurred but has not yet been acknowledged Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x TimestampDropped BOOL Dropped Timestamp lIndicates whether a timestamp was lost as a result of one of the Connection
260. r in place of the x 005 0 5 m 010 1 0 m 025 2 5 m 050 5 m Build to order cable lengths are also available Table 67 Module Connectors No of Conductors Nominal Outer Diameter 1492 CABLEXTBNH 20 0 823 mm 18 AWG 11 4 mm 0 45 in 1492 CABLEXTBCH 490 14 1 mm 0 55 in 1756 TBCH RTB at the 1 0 Module End 1756 TBNH 1 Cables are available in lengths of 0 5 m 1 0 m 2 5 m and 5 0 m To order insert the code for the desired cable length into the catalog number in place of the x 005 0 5 m 010 1 0 m 25 2 5 m 050 5 m Build to order cable lengths are also available 2 Four conductors are not connected to the RTB 248 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1756 UM058F EN P April 2012 Appendix H History of Changes 1756 UM058F EN P April 2012 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 250 This appendix summarizes the revisions to this manual Reference this appendix if you need information to determine what changes have been made across multiple revisions This may be especially useful if you are deciding to upgrade your hardware or software based on information added with previous revisions of this manual Change Added sections about using CIP Sync time Added the 1756 OB16IEF module to the list of modules with electronic fusing Added a chapter to describe features of the 1756 IB16IF and 1756 0B16IEF modules Added connection formats for the 1756 IB16IF
261. r terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 9 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC and four terminals per output 1756 0B16IS 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 9 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output Isolated with 240V AC DC and four terminals per output Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 x cable length 245 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 0832 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40D24 Status indica
262. r to the documentation supplied with the output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the device Outputs on fast output modules can be directly wired to inputs on fast input modules Module features include all the common features described in Chapter 3 as well the extended capabilities described within this chapter For higher speed control the 1756 OBIGIEF output module can be configured to receive input status over the backplane directly from the 1756 IB16IF input module or 1756 LSC8XIBSI counter module without controller processing This feature know as peer ownership is described in the ControlLogix Peer Ownership Application Technique publication 1756 AT016 IMPORTANT To configure the modules you must have the following e The 1756 0B16IEF module requires RSLogix 5000 software version 18 02 00 or later or Studio 5000 environment version 21 00 00 or later The 1756 0B16IEFS module requires Studio 5000 environment version 21 00 00 or later e The Add on Profile AOP for each module available for download at http support rockwellautomation com controlflash LogixProfiler asp Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Features Specific to Fast Input Modules Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Response Time The tables below indicate the screw to backplane response time of fast input and fast output modules Table 16 Input Response Time Delay Response
263. re delay to energize the input typically 70 us on the 1756 0B16E module e ASIC scan of 200 ps In the worst case scenario with a filter time of 0 ms the 1756 0B16E module has a 270 us signal propagation delay These times are not guaranteed See Chapter 8 for nominal and maximum delay times for each module With ControlLogix I O modules a connection is the data transfer link between a controller and an I O module A connection can be one of these types e Direct e Rack optimized The table lists the advantages and disadvantages of each connection type Connection Type Advantages Disadvantages Direct All input and data echo information is With more data transferring over the transferred including diagnostic network your system does not operate as information and fusing data efficiently as with rack connections Rack optimized Connection usage is economized The Input and data echo information is limited owner controller has a single RPI value for to general faults and data each connection Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 23 Chapter 2 24 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Direct Connections A direct connection is a real time data transfer link between the controller and the device that occupies the slot that the configuration data references When module configuration data is downloaded to an owner controller the controller attempts to establish a direct conn
264. responding bit in the FaultMode tag to be cleared 0 Off 1 0n Pt x FaultFinalState BOOL Fault Final State Determines the final output state once the time in the Connection Data FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses Output Data Data 0 Output turns Off once the time in the FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses and module is still faulted 1 Output turns On once the time in the FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses and module is still faulted Pt x ProgMode BOOL Program Mode Used in conjunction with the ProgValue tag to determine the state of Connection Data 204 output is currently On the output will continue to use PWM until the cycle limit is reached Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Table 51 1756 0B16IEFS Module Configuration Tags Data Output continued Name Pt x ProgValue Data Type BOOL Tag Definition Program Value Defines the output state during Program mode Requires the corresponding bit for the ProgMode tag to be cleared 0 The output state is Off during Program mode 1 The output state is On during Program mode Tag Definitions Module Definition Connection Data Output Data Data Appendix B Pt x PWMEnable BOOL Enable PWM When set the pulse train for the output point is controlled by the current PWM configuration 0 PWM is disabled default 1 PWMis enabled and the output uses PWM when the output is On Connect
265. rial number WHO Information 10 WHO serial number 4 DINT Number of characters in the text string WHO Information 14 WHO string length 1 SINT Devices ASCII text string describing the module WHO Information 15 WHO asci string 32 220 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The following table lists tags used in the Source and Destination fields of the message instructions Table 59 Source and Destination Field Tags Source Tag Description Enable 32 Points DINT Parameter used to determine which points are enabled for the service That is if bit 0 1 for Reset Fuse then point 0 has its electronic fuse reset Results 32 Points DINT Pass 0 Fail 1 result for the service That is if bit 0 1 for the results ofthe Reset Fuse then the Reset Fuse failed for point 0 If you are using RSLogix 5000 software version 10 07 00 or later choose the physical location slot number and data type in the Source Element and Destination fields Communication Tab The Communication tab provides information on the path of the message instruction For example the slot number ofa 1756 OA8D module distinguishes exactly which module a message is designated for IMPORTANT Use the Brown button to see a list ofthe 1 0 modules in the system You choose a path when you choose a module from the list You must
266. roubleshoot standard and ControlLogix XT versions of the 1756 chassis and power supplies including redundant power supplies ControlLogix Analog 1 0 Modules User Manual publication 1756 UM009 Describes how to install configure and troubleshoot ControlLogix analog 1 0 modules ControlLogix Data Highway Plus Remote 1 0 Communication Interface Module User Manual publication 1756 UM514 Describes how to configure and operate the ControlLogix DH Remote 1 0 module ControlLogix XT Data Highway Plus Remote 1 0 Communication Interface Module Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN638 Describes how to install configure and troubleshoot the ControlLogix XT Data Highway Plus Remote 1 0 Communication Interface module ControlLogix System User Manual publication 1756 UM001 Describes how to install configure program and operate a ControlLogix system Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system Product Certifications website http ab com Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative Rockwell Automation
267. s see Chapter 5 134 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 Connection Properties Connection properties define controller to module behavior When defining connection properties you can do the following e Select a requested packet interval RPI to set a defined maximum period of time when data is transferred to the owner controller e Choose to inhibit the module e Configure the controller so that a loss of connection to this module causes a major fault e View information about the condition of the connection between the module and the controller Follow these steps to configure connection properties 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Connection tab E Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI 20 0 ms 0 2 750 0 ms C Inhibit Module C Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline 2 Complete the fields as described below and click OK Field Description Requested Packet Interval RPI Enter an RPI value or use the default See RPI in Chapter 2 for more information Inhibit module Check the box to prevent communication between the owner controller and the module This option allows for maintenance of the module without faults being re
268. s 131 Edit rhe Configuratii pecie d o daa rtu d o PA EAS ZUR dE RUNDE 134 Connection Properties ioa ed esndu uuo doo rau eR o PUT dE RE Qu 135 View and Change Module Tags csed lt nclosscansexpadtavaeswesdaats 136 Chapter 8 Dua 3r 5 19 Tcr en 139 TOG sca S supp rR VE REEBMPEUEHEEI IEEE 139 1756 DA GI spc eo erre ie exa C en co a a 140 1756 DA32 urre Eb rec ebbe 141 I7SG6 IBIG 0 2 ccc e ennnes 142 Dd To HIT 143 1756 IBIGODs testo nds ee Eee ee PEUT 144 1756 IBIGIE eese esee he ry tann r yy E na 145 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 7 Table of Contents Troubleshoot Your Module Tag Definitions 19GB Sino hes nnn I Tor Ont bbbeRd aan NE EU eas 146 TROND 147 lp D Plo m TTC aden 148 ligi s c ee rere are ere TTE er 149 1756 INL LGL is oe sicnry av R e e hie swans VENE a Cir e Rand ER 150 1756 IN MB costa dukc bph Ese uoa add usd oca o pU Add ERU Kd 150 1756 D RO oeste are mene rye ee qb bo dadas ud re aes ao 11 Wi cR 152 ore s 153 1756 QA8D pr 154 1756 QABE C M 155 755640 18 bo ttd opta bebedad pad aa a S DUE 156 Wo e UL m 157 1756 OBS Merc oda En E EEEE 158 wn OBS EL Cm 159 rei P 160 1756 OBI6D essc curat iab LIE e te samc AUCI ER Md 161 IS DIOE sents iride nents gee eee 162 1736 BIBI cc cctvatectadesasdenieaddenapieoasensaaaeencesns 163 1750 OBICIE E C EErEE 164
269. s not enabled output points turn On immediately at the start of the cycle Figure 19 The stagger time for an output is calculated when the output turns On If the On time and cycle times are changed by large amounts while the output is On the stagger times may begin to overlap If the cumulative On time of staggered outputs is less than the cycle each new On transition is staggered to begin 50 us after the prior staggered output turns Off Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 101 Chapter5 Fast Module Features Figure 18 Outputs with Staggering Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Figure 19 Outputs without Staggering Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 PWM Configuration Follow these steps to configure PWM 1 Use program logic or the RSLogix 5000 tag editor to define the Cycle time and On time for an output point via the PWMCycleTime and PWMOnTime output tags For more information about module tags refer to Appendix B 2 On the Module Properties dialog box click the PWM Configuration tab Wi Module Properties Local 6 1756 OB161EF 1 1 Generi Connection Module into Output State PWM Conhigusbon Diagnostics Time Sync EISE n pate peser ESj ae ee sores om s 9 jJ 1 n j m j m jon ju xe Pulse Width Modulation Enable Pulse Width Mock dation PWM
270. s the changes do not occur within 500 us of each other If multiple input points configured for COS change state within 500 us of each other a single CST value is generated for all making it appear that they changed at exactly the same time Timestamping in Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the scheduled outputs feature so that after conjunction with input data changes state and a timestamp occurs an output point will actuate at some scheduled outputs configured time in the future You can schedule outputs up to 16 seconds into the future When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs you must do the following e Choose a communication or connection format for each input and output module that allows timestamping For more information refer to Communication or Connection Formats on page 131 e Have a time master in the same chassis as both 1 0 modules Disable COS for all input points on the input module except the point being timestamped TIP For scheduled outputs to work most effectively remember the following items e The time to schedule outputs to transition in the future must account for any controller backplane and network delays Thel 0 modules must reside in the same rack as the time master Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 47 Chapter 3 48 Common Module Features Use CIP Sync Time with Fast 1 0 Modules The 1756 IBI6IF 1756 OBIGIEF and 17
271. s will be set For more information see page 106 Input Data Data or Timestamp Data 0 No fault or 1 Fault Connection Data with Event or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data LocalClockOffset DINT Local Clock Offset Indicates the offset in microseconds between the current CST and Connection Data Data with Event the CIP Sync value when a valid CIP Sync time is available Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data OffsetTimestamp DINT Timestamp Offset Indicates when the CIP Sync time was last updated The timestamp Connection Data Data with Event is in CIP Synctime Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data GrandMasterClockID DINT Grandmaster Clock ID lIndicates the ID of the CIP Sync Grandmaster to which the Connection Data Data with Event module is synced Listen Only or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data 190 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Table 44 1756 IB16IF Module Input Tags continued Tag Definitions Name DataType Tag Definition Module Definition Pt x Data BOOL Input Status lIndicates whether an input point is On or Off Connection Data or Listen Only 0 The input point is Off Input Data Data or Timestamp Data 1 The input point is On or Connection Data with Event or Listen Only with Event Input Data Timestamp Data Pt x Fault BOOL Quality of Data afte
272. scription Product type Module product type such as digital 1 0 or analog 1 0 Product code Module s catalog number Major revision Module s major revision number Minor revision Module s minor revision number Status Module status including these items Controller ownership Whether the module has been configured e Device specific status such as the following Self test Update in progress Communications fault Not owned outputs in Program mode Internal fault needs update Run mode Program mode outputs only Minor recoverable fault Minor unrecoverable fault Major recoverable fault Major unrecoverable fault Vendor Module s manufacturer vendor such as Allen Bradley Serial number Module s serial number Length of ASCII text string Number of characters in module s text string ASCII text string Module s ASCII text string description IMPORTANT You must perform a WHO service to retrieve this information For more information refer to page 228 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 17 Chapter1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Notes 18 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Chapter 2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Topic Page Ownership 20 Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software 20 Internal Module Operation 21 Conn
273. set Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned Off During normal operating conditions hardware damage should not be possible An output shorted to L2 may temporarily cause a hardware point fault See output shorted to L2 as a possible cause Ladder commands output to be On Ladder commands output to be Off Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 The following table lists possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OB16D module Table 10 1756 0B16D Point level Fault Scenarios Possible cause of fault 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as oft 9 Output is shorted to GND 2 Fuse Blown bit is set 2 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off One of the following could be the cause 2 Pulse Test fails 2 No Load bit is set 1 No Load e FUSE Test passes 2 Output shorted to DC 3 No power at module 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as 0n 2 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off Hardware point damage 2 Output Verify sets a bit 2 Pulse Test fails 1 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The
274. sis TIP When you choose a Listen only format only the General and Connection tabs appear when you view a module s properties in RSLogix 5000 software Controllers that want to listen to a module but not own it use a Listen only format Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 131 Chapter7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules The tables below describe the communication and connection formats available for input modules Table 26 Input Module Communication Formats Communication Format Input Data Data Return Module returns only general fault and input data CST Timestamped Input Data Module returns input data with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the input data changes Rack Optimization The 1756 CNB module collects all digital input words in the remote chassis and sends them to the controller as a single rack image This connection type limits the status and diagnostic information available Listen Only Input Data Listen Only CST Timestamped Input Data Listen Only Rack Optimization These formats have the same definition as the similarly named options above except that they are Listen only connections Module 1756 1A16 1756 IA161 1756 1A32 1756 IB161 1756 1B16 1756 1B32 1756 IC16 1756 1616 1756 IH161 1756 IM16l 1756 IN16 1756 IV16 1756 1V32 Full Diagnostic Input Data Module returns input data the value of
275. ssage Contiol Slot4_B1_fuse_reset fa bec DN ee ERE Loca 8l Dalal Local4 FuseBlown 1 Loca 8l Dala 2 M 86 1 Type OP Generic EN Message Conal Pulse test slcid r z bNo AER MOV T Move L Soures Pulee_test_elbt4_bO EMERR 0 De Pluse_Results_Slot4 0 est T 2 0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_O U0_O000 f T I Locd 81 Dala 3 MSG JE Type CIP Genetic Message Control TT reset EE CDND ERo End LE Matnruutie ji 4 l Click the box in each rung to see the associated configuration and communication The rungs perform these functions e Rungs 0 and 1 are used to perform a reset fuse service on Bits 0 and 1 respectively The example is ofa 1756 OA8D module in slot 4 e Rung2 performs a pulse test service to slot 4 e Rung3 moves the results of the pulse test to a data storage location The actual results appear in the message instruction tags under the tag name EXERR e Rung 4 performs a reset latched diagnostics service to slot 4 This example shows an output module Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 227 Appendix C 228 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration The Controller Tags dialog box shows examples of the tags created in the ladder logic as displayed in the tag editor
276. state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off By default the output remains in the Fault mode state as long as the fault condition persists e Final state Defines whether the output transitions to the On or Off state after the duration of the Fault mode state elapses By default the output transitions to the Off state EXAMPLE You define a duration of 1 second and a final state of On for an output point Ifa fault occurs at that point the output remains in its Fault mode state Off On or Hold for 1 second before transitioning to the On state IMPORTANT Ifa connection is reestablished after an output point goes into Fault mode but before the duration time elapses the settings you specify for the duration and final state no longer apply For example if you specify a 10 second duration and a final state of Off and the fault ends in 3 seconds the output point never transitions to the final state of Off Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 95 Chapter5 Fast Module Features For more information about defining a Fault mode state refer to Configurable Point level Output States on page 55 Follow these steps to configure a fault state delay 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Output State tab Wi Module Properties Local 6 1756 081 61EF 1 1 Generi Connection Modde into utpul Stale PWM Conhourson Disgnetbet Time Syne wj Forever vw Forever vj Forever vj Forever vj
277. stem Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 11 Preface Additional Resources 12 These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation Resource Description 1756 ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Specifications Technical Data publication 1756 TD002 Provides specifications for ControlLogix 1 0 modules ControlLogix High speed Counter Module User Manual publication 1756 UM007 Describes how to install configure and troubleshoot the 1756 HSC counter module ControlLogix Low speed Counter Module User Manual publication 1756 UM536 Describes how to install configure and troubleshoot the 1756 LSC8XIB8I counter module ControlLogix Peer 1 0 Control Application Technique publication 1756 AT016 Describes typical peer control applications and provides details about how to configure 1 0 modules for peer control operation Position based Output Control with the MAOC Instruction publication 1756 AT017 Describes typical applications for using scheduled output modules with the Motion Axis Output Cam MAOC instruction Integrated Architecture and CIP Sync Configuration Application Technique publication IA AT003 Describes how to configure CIP Sync with Integrated Architecture products and applications ControlLogix Chassis and Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN005 Describes how to install and t
278. sten only Rack Optimization then the I O module must also use Listen only Rack Optimization A rack optimized connection economizes bandwidth between owner controllers and digital I O modules in the remote chassis Rather than having several direct connections with individual RPI values an owner controller has a single rack connection with a single RPI value That RPI value accommodates all digital I O modules in the remote chassis Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 IMPORTANT Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 Because rack optimized connections are applicable only in applications that use a remote chassis you must configure the communication format as described in Chapter 7 for both the remote 1 0 module and the remote 1756 CNB module or EtherNet IP module Make sure you configure both modules for rack optimization If you choose a different communication format for each module the controller makes two connections to the same chassis one for each format and the same data travels across the ControlNet network If you use rack optimization for both modules you preserve bandwidth and configure your system to operate more efficiently The input or data echo information is limited to general faults and data No additional status such as diagnostic information is available IMPORTANT Each controller can establish connections in any combination of direct or rack optimiz
279. t te next time the input turns On the module records the transition as timestamp 21 6 once the input passes the filter time 0 1 2 3 4 7 18 39 20 21 2 Time in milliseconds Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 91 Chapter5 Fast Module Features Follow these steps to configure input filter times 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab 2 In the Input Filter Time column enter Off to On and On to Off input filter times from 0 30 000 us and click OK Wil Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB161F 1 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Enable COS Timestamp Enable Input Filter Time us Port orton Ej onsor L Pie Points 0 15 o Latch Timestamps Ooooooooooooooo0o KS ES KS I STIST ISTIS SS ES S SS SS KS ES KS I ES ES KES SS ES KS ESE Status Offline 3 Complete the fields as described in the table below and click OK Field Description Configuration Tag Enable Filter To enable filtering for a point check the corresponding checkbox Pt x FilterEn To disable filtering for a point clear the corresponding checkbox Input Filter Time Enter an Off to On input filter time from 0 30 000 us FilterOffOn Off gt On Input Filter Time Enter an On to Off input filter time from 0 30 000 us FilterOnOff On Off 92 Rockwell Au
280. t input modules 106 output modules 107 standard input modules 64 output modules 65 Studio 5000 environment 11 T task event 28 93 94 timestamps CIP Sync 48 202 209 224 CST 47 222 diagnostic 69 latch 89 tips conserving ControlNet bandwidth 28 listen only communication format 131 pulse test 78 trigger event task 28 93 94 troubleshooting module status indicators 16 50 wW wiring connections extended depth housing 120 field wiring options 56 75 interface module 14 isolated and non isolated modules 53 recommendations for wiring RTB 118 removable terminal block 14 114 256 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools You can also visit our Knowledgebase at http www rockwellautomation com knowledgebase for FAQs technical information support chat and forums software updates and to sign up for product notification updates For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rock
281. t Input Modules o n ois ret n 85 la le oo PTT 86 Per Point Timestamping and Change of State sss 87 Software Configurable Filter Times eere err rns 90 Dedicated Connection for Event Tasks 0ee eee ee ee 93 Features Specific to Fast Output Modules scisscanceseasancasanes 95 Programmable Fault State Delays i22 eee add suis ae teo Nadbaarag s 95 Pulse Width Modulation cccccsrsrrscsccrocssenrccacorssries 97 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers 106 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 107 Chapter 6 Install the Module n ricsei sco Ed ee suretde a boan A UO REPE UE n Key the Removable Terminal Block seeeeueeuuuuee 113 Connect the Wires 0 cece cece cence tenet eee ene eneeeenes 114 RTB TYPES Em 116 RTB Wiring Recommendations yccciwssiadakcuuvededeice purae 118 Assemble the Removable Terminal Block and Housing 119 Choose Extended depth Housing 0 0 c cece cence eee es 120 Cabinet Size Considerations with Extended depth Housing 121 Install the Removable Terminal Block 0 0 ccc eee ees 122 Remove the Removable Terminal Block uusuueue 123 Remove the Module from the Chassis 0 0ceeeeeeeees 125 Chapter 7 Configuration Process Overview ssec ese erae eoa d an 128 Create a New Module sese 129 Communication or Connection Formats e00e ee
282. t tags If PWM is enabled C PWMEnable 1 and the output is instructed to turn On 0 Data 1 the output generates a PWM signal 0 Pt x PWMOnTime 0 PWM OnTime PWM Cycle Time view only Displays the duration of each pulse cycle as defined in the PWMCycleTime output tag This value is always displayed in seconds with a range of 0 001 3600 0 seconds IMPORTANT Before PWM will function you must enable PWM during configuration and define the PWM cycle time and On time in the PWMCycleTime and PWMOnTime output tags If PWM is enabled C PWMEnable 1 and the output is instructed to turn On 0 Data 1 the output generates a PWM signal 0 Pt x PWM CycleTime 0 PWM CycleTime Minimum On Time Type the minimum length of time required for the output to turn On This value must be defined in seconds For example if a heating coil requires a minimum of 2 seconds to heat up and you enter a value of 2 000 in this field the shortest pulse allowed is never less than 2 000 seconds The default value of zero disables the feature C Pt x PWMMinimumOnTime C PWM MinimumOnTime Extend Cycle to Accommodate Minimum On Time Check or clear this checkbox to determine the output behavior when the On time is less than the minimum On time e Check the checkbox to increase the duration of the pulse cycle to maintain the On time to Cycle time ratio while taking into account the minimum On time Note Extending the cyc
283. ta for the corresponding point All blown fuse conditions are latched and must be reset Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Fuse is not blown per Module 1 Fuse is blown and has not been reset or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x PWMCycleLimitDone BOOL PWM Cycle Limit Done Indicates whether the PWM pulse cycle limit defined in the Connection Data Pt x PWMCycleLimit configuration tag has been reached Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 The PWM cycle limit has not yet been reached The bit resets to 0 each time the output per Module transitions to On to begin a new PWM cycle or 1 The PWM cycle limit has been reached Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid tndicates whether the module has synchronized to a valid CIP Sync Connection Data time master on the backplane Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 CIP Sync is not available per Module 1 CIP Sync is available or Connection Listen Only Output Data None or Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout Indicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has timed Connection Data out Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 A valid time master has not timed out per Module 1 A valid time master was detected on the backplane but the t
284. ta SINT Schedule Data Indicates the On Off state to apply to an output point at the scheduled Connection Data time 0 Off 1 0n Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Scheduled per Point 209 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 54 1756 0B16IEFS Module Output Data Tags Scheduled per Point Output continued Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition Type Schedule x Offset DINT Schedule Offset lndicates a schedule offset value to be added to the baseline Connection Data ScheduleTimestamp value to determine the absolute time at which a physical output will Output Data Scheduled per turn On or Off Point The offset value must be 35 minutes from the baseline ScheduleTimestamp value PWM CycleTime REAL PWM Cycle Time Defines the duration of each pulse cycle Requires PWM to be enabled Connection Data via the PWM Enable configuration tag Output Data Scheduled per Valid values 0 001 3600 0 seconds Point PWM OnTime REAL PWM On Time Defines the length of time that a pulse is active Requires PWM to be Connection Data Table 55 1756 0B16IEFS Modu enabled via the PWM Enable configuration tag Valid values 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or 0 100 0 percent le Output Data Tags Data Output Output Data Scheduled per Point Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition Type Pt x Data BOOL Data Indicates the On Off sta
285. tag to be cleared per Module 0 0ff or 1 0n Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x FaultFinalState BOOL Fault Final State Determines the final output state once the time in the Connection Data Pt x FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Output turns Off once the time in the Pt x FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses and per Module module is still faulted or 1 Output turns On once the time in the Pt x FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses and Connection Peer Ownership module is still faulted Output Data Data with Peer Pt x ProgMode BOOL Program Mode Used in conjunction with the Pt x ProgValue tag to determine the Connection Data state of outputs when the controller is in Program mode Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 Uses the output value defined in the Pt x ProgValue tag default per Module 1 Holds the last state of the output If PWM is enabled for the output point and the or output is currently On the output will continue to use PWM until the cycle limit is reached Connection Peer Ownership Output Data Data with Peer Pt x ProgValue BOOL Program Value Defines the output state during Program mode Requires the Connection Data corresponding bit for the Pt x ProgMode tag to be cleared Output Data Data or Scheduled 0 The output state is Off during Program mode per Module 1 The output state is On during Program mode or Connection Peer Own
286. tags e Pr x NewDataOffOnAck Acknowledges that the input point has transitioned to an On state and resets the timestamp latch Pr x NewDataOnOffAck Acknowledges that the input point has transitioned to an Off state and resets the timestamp latch The Pt x TimestampDropped input tag indicates whether a new timestamp has not been recorded because a previous timestamp was either latched or unacknowledged Once a timestamp latch is reset for an input point a new timestamp may be recorded in the Pt x Timestamp OffOn or Pt x Timestamp OnOff input tags upon the next transition You can configure per point timestamping in three Ways e Timestamping enabled without latching default configuration e Timestamping enabled with latching e Timestamping disabled Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 87 Chapter 5 88 Fast Module Features Follow these steps to configure per point timestamping and enable COS 1 On the New Module dialog box click Change to display the Module Definition dialog box ME New Module Germial Connection Module Info Configuration Type T755AB1EIF 15 Point 24V High Speed DC Isolated Input Sink Source Vendor AderBiadiny Local Name Descmplioni Module Definition Series Review Electronic Key Compstitte Module Connection Went Data Module Definition Vata Tmestomo Osto Star Cinating Opens the Module Def
287. tate device Whether your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 37 Chapter 3 Common Module Features Output Module Compatibility ControlLogix output modules can be used to drive a variety of output devices 38 Typical output devices compatible with ControlLogix outputs include these items e Motor starters e Solenoids e Indicators Follow these guidelines when designing a system e Make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation e Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads refer to the documentation supplied with the output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the device The ControlLogix standard digital outputs are capable of directly driving the ControlLogix standard digital inputs The exceptions are the AC and DC diagnostic input modules When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For information on the compatibility of motor starters with ControlLogix output modules see Appendix E Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Common Features The table below lists features common to all ControlLogix digital I O modules Tope Page Removal and Insertion Un
288. tate of outputs when the controller is in Program 1 bit per point mode See ProgMode 0 Off 1 0n ProgloFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transition of outputs to FaultMode if a communication failure 1 byte per module Se Program mode Otherwise outputs will remain in Program mode See ProgMode ProgValue FaultMode aultValue 0 Outputs stay in Program mode if a communication failure occurs 1 Outputs go to FaultMode if a communication failure occurs 186 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Tag Definitions Appendix B Table 38 Standard Output Module Input Data Tags Name Data Type Definition CSTTimestamp DINT 2 Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input data including fusing see BlownFuse 8 bytes NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away Data DINT Data Off On status for the output point echoed back from the output module This is used to verify proper 1 bit per point communication only No field side verification is done For field side verification see OutputVerifyFault 0 Off 1 0n Fault DINT Fault This is an ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and 1 0 data for that point may be incorrect 1 bit per point Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input m
289. te and compares it to the system side state Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4 This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix B If an output cannot be verified a point level fault is sent to the controller Follow these steps to enable the field side output verification 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab E Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Pulse Test Backplane Enable Diagnostics for Enable Diag Program Mode Fault Mode Output Verify Field Power Loss Latching Rd M v NISI SI XI XI SII XI NISI SI XI XI SII XI If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Communications Failure Es Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the Output Verify column e To enable the feature for a specific point check the corresponding checkbox e To disable the feature for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 77 Chapter 4 78 Diagnostic Module Features Pulse Test Pulse test is a feature found on diagnostic output
290. te to apply to a nonscheduled output point Connection Data 0 Off Output Data Data 1 0n Pt x ResetFuseBlown BOOL Reset Blown Fuse Attempts to clear a blown fuse status and apply output datawhen Connection Data the bit transitions from Off to On Output Data Data REAL PWM Cycle Time Defines the duration of each pulse cycle Requires PWM to be enabled Connection Data via the PWM Enable configuration tag Output Data Data Valid values 0 001 3600 0 seconds Pt x PWMOnTime REAL PWM On Time Defines the length of time that a pulse is active Requires PWM to be Connection Data Pt x PWMCycleTime 210 enabled via the PWM Enable configuration tag Valid values 0 0002 3600 0 seconds or 0 100 0 percent Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Data Array Data Structures Tag Definitions Appendix B Fast digital I O modules use an array data structure In this type of structure all the tags for a particular point are organized under that point For example in Figure 26 all of the tags that appear under point 0 also appear under points 1 15 for the input module in slot 1 With this structure you can copy or access all of the data for a particular point by simply referencing or copying the point or alias for the point such as Pt 3 or PressureValveTank3 Figure 26 Array Data Structure Hh Local 1 1 Pt H Locat 1 1 P0 Hocat1 1 P40Data ooo
291. that are available with digital 1 0 modules Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 broadcast change of state COS communication format compatible match connection coordinated system time CST direct connection disable keying download electronic keying exact match field side inhibit interface module IFM listen only connection major revision Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Glossary Data transmissions to all addresses or functions Any change in the ON or OFF state of a point on an I O module Format that defines the type of information transferred between an I O module and its owner controller This format also defines the tags created for each I O module An electronic keying protection mode that requires that the physical module and the module configured in the software to match according to vendor and catalog number In this case the minor revision of the module must be greater than or equal to that of the configured slot The communication mechanism from the controller to another module in the control system Timer value which is kept synchronized for all modules within a single ControlBus chassis An I O connection where the controller establishes an individual connection with I O modules An electronic keying protection mode that requires no attributes of the physical module and the module configured in the software to mat
292. the output point for which to reset a latched fault 3 Click OK 62 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Time scheduled Output Control Time scheduled output control is available for these modules e 1756 OB16IS Provides time scheduled output control in CST time for outputs 0 7 Allows for schedules with a minimum interval of 100 us e 1756 OB16IEFS Provides time scheduled output control in CIP Sync time for outputs 0 15 Allows for schedules with a minimum interval of 5 us By using the time scheduled output control feature the module can turn the outputs On or Off at a scheduled time You can set the time for the output to turn On or Off in program logic The modules manage the time locally so that the output is turned On or Offat the specified time MAOC Instructions with Time scheduled Output Control The Motion Axis Output Cam MAOC instruction provides position based control of outputs by using position and velocity information of any motion axis When the 1756 OBI6IS or 1756 OB16IEFS module is specified as the output destination for the MAOC instruction the MAOC instruction automatically handles time based scheduling for outputs The benefit of using output scheduling in this manner is that the resolution of the output control is improved from the motion coarse update rate typically 1 32 ms to 100 us for outputs 0 7 on the 1756 OBI6IS module and 1
293. ting Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 XIM4024 8R Relay Master 40 pin master with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIM4024 16R 40 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays 1492 XIM4024 16RF 40 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays with fusing 1492 XIM24 8R Relay Expander Expander with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIMF F24 2 Fusible Expander Eight channel expander with 24V AC blown fuse indicators 1492 XIM24 16RF Expander with sixteen 24V DC relays with fusing 1492 XIMF 2 Feed through Expander Expander with eight feed through channels 1756 0C8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLEXW x cable length 1492 IFM20F FS2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals per output and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0616 N A 1756 0H8l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicat
294. tion Appendix C The user defined WHO data structure displays module identification information in an easily understood format For example the Controller Tags dialog box shows the module s major revision is 2 Controller Tags who controller Shaw Show All Sort Taa Nane z Force Mask Style Scope whe ccrtrolier TEE AB1756 DIC O 4i Loc Jue AB 1755 DIO go WIO_luifuunction fel HH WHU vendor Hex INT A B WH product Iype Decma INT mewHO oroduct coce Decima INT ee resisie Decima SINT B WHO ines pevisa 5 Decimi SINT sewnustsus zs uuu c binary II S ELWHO serid number 168c000 Obaf Hea DINT WHO sting leraih 32 Decima SINT WHO a ci_sting mm 1 Hex SINT 22 1255 SINT 49 Tem MESSAGE Monitor Tags You do not have to create the user defined data structure If you choose not to create this structure you can use the ASCII string and String length to retrieve and understand module identification through some interface excluding RSLogix 5000 software Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 229 Appendix C 230 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration The illustration shows an example WHO ladder logic application Copy File Srurce WHO_Intcematior 2 Des WHO podut bpe Leriglh 2 LE IP G
295. to the module fault word Depending on the module type a bit set in the module fault word can mean multiple things as indicated in the following table Table 7 Bits Set in Module fault Word Condition Bits Set Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Fuse blown Only the bit affected is set to 1 Field power loss Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 65 Chapter3 Common Module Features Module fault Word All modules Fuse Blown Word Point Level Group Level 1756 0A8D 1756 0416 1756 0A8E 1756 0B16E 1756 0B8EI 1756 0V16E 1756 0B16D 1756 0V32E 1756 0B16IEF Field Power Loss Word 1756 0A8E only 66 Bit 31 A communications fault sets all bits in the module fault word A fuse blown or field power loss condition sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word The following illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix digital output modules Bit 0 Group 1 Group 0 jowl 1 A blown fuse for any point or group sets the bit for that point or group in the fuse blown word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word Group 1 Group 0 1
296. tomation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Output Data Scheduled per Point or Connection Listen Only Output Data None Table 52 1756 0B16IEFS Module Input Data Tags Scheduled per Point Output continued Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout Indicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has timed Connection Data out Output Data Scheduled per 0 A valid time master has not timed out Point 1 A valid time master was detected on the backplane but the time master has timed or out The module is currently using its local clock Connection Listen Only Output Data None LateScheduleCount INT Late Schedule Count Increments each time a schedule is received late after its Connection Data scheduled time The counter rolls over every 65 535 late schedules Output Data Scheduled per If a late schedule is the most recent schedule for a point the output will still be driven to Point new state Monitoring the late schedule count may be useful to determine whether network delays or connection losses are impacting schedules LostScheduleCount INT Lost Schedule Count Increments each time the Schedule SequenceNumber output Connection Data tag skips a value A skipped sequence number may indicate a lost schedule The counter Output Data Scheduled per rolls over every 65 535 lost schedules Point
297. tomation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Fast Module Features Chapter 5 Dedicated Connection for Event Tasks The 1756 IB16IF input module can initiate an event task over a dedicated second connection in response to four user defined input patterns You can define these patterns in real time during a control process by using these output tags e Event x Mask Defines which input points trigger the event task e Event x Value Defines whether the masked input points must be in the On or Off state before the event task is triggered Each pattern can use any of the module s 16 input points as shown in the examples below In example pattern 1 the input module triggers the event task when input points 0 7 are in the On state Table 18 Example Pattern 1 Output Tag Bit Position Event x Mask Event x Value In example pattern 2 the input module triggers the event task when input points 0 7 are in the Off state Table 19 Example Pattern 2 Output Tag Bit Position 15 Event x Mask Event x Value 0 0 O O 0 lO O JO x x x x x x fx fx In example pattern 3 the input module triggers the event task when input points 4 6 8 and 10 are in the On state Table 20 Example Pattern 3 Bit Position Output Tag Event x Mask Event x Value Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 93 Chapter 5 94 Fast Module
298. tput verify fault signals of the other channels should be checked and reset if a short circuit on one channel occurs The recommended fuse for this module has been sized to provide short circuit protection for wiring only to external loads In the event of a short circuit on an output channel it is likely that the transistor or relay associated with that channel will be damaged and the module should be replaced or a spare output channel used for the load The fuse does not provide overload protection In the event of an overload on an output channel it is likely that the fuse will not blow and the transistor or relay associated with that channel will be damaged To provide overload protection for your application user supplied fuse should be installed externally and properly sized to match the individual load characteristics The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 You can reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 software during online monitoring or through program logic running on a controller If your module uses point level fusing you can reset a fuse with a CIP Generic Messag
299. troller the owner controller normally sends data to the output module at the RPI rate specified Updates are not performed at the end of the controllers tasks In addition the role of the RPI for a remote output module changes slightly with respect to getting data from the owner controller Remote Output Modules Connected via the ControlNet Network When an RPI value is specified for an output module in a remote chassis connected to the owner controller by a scheduled ControlNet network in addition to instructing the owner controller to multicast the output data within its own chassis the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI But the control system will guarantee that the output module will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI as shown in the illustration below Figure 5 Remote Output Modules on ControlNet Network Remote Chassis 8 amp 8 8 OOs 32 Ed E Oo oO n H I E Lt ooo LEE LIT ooo EX U 0H Data is sent from the t Output data is sent at o
300. ts DINT Enable 32 Points DINT Pulse Test Paramete rs SINT 10 Number of Elements 0 0 0 4 4 10 bytes Destination CST Information SINT WHO Information SINT N A N A Results 32 Points DINT N A 20 48 Modules All All All 1756 OA8D 1756 1756 0A8D 1756 1756 0A8D 1756 OB16D 1756 OA8E 0B16D 0B16D 1756 IA8D 1756 IB16D When you are using RSLogix 5000 software version 9 00 00 or earlier some services require multiple parameters and tags in the Source and Destination fields An example is Pulse Test These services use copy instructions to move multiple tags to and from the message instruction source and destination tags The following table lists the copy instruction parameters needed for these services Table 58 Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services Required for RSLogix 5000 Software Version 9 00 00 or Earlier Source Destination Tag in MSG Instruction Pulse Test ParametersSINT 10 Description Determines which point to perform the pulse test on Each bit corresponds to a point Only test one point at a time Copy Instruction COP This instruction moves data to from generic source destination buffers Source Enable 32 points DINT Destination Pulse Test Parameters 0 4 Length bytes Determines maximum pulse width of the pulse test in milliseconds Pulse test inverts state of the output up to the maximum specified time Units are in 100 us increments Default tag value
301. ts from being triggered for a point via the pattern defined Connection Data with Event in the Event x Mask and Event x Value tags For more information see page 93 Input Data Timestamp Data 0 Events are triggered 1 Events are not triggered Event x NewEventAck BOOL Acknowledge New Event When set acknowledges a new event has occurred as Connection Data with Event 192 indicated by the Event x NewEvent event tag 0 A new event has not been acknowledged 1 A new event has been acknowledged Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Input Data Timestamp Data Table 46 1756 IB16IF Module Event Tags Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition Fault DINT Fault Status Indicates whether a point is faulted If communication to the input Connection Data with Event or Listen module is lost then all 32 bits will be set For more information see page 106 Only with Event 0 No fault has occurred Input Data Timestamp Data 1 A fault has occurred Event x NewEvent BOOL New Event Indicates whether a new event has occurred This bit is cleared only when Connection Data with Event or Listen acknowledged by the Event x NewEventAck output tag or reset by the ResetEvents Only with Event output tag Input Data Timestamp Data 0 No new event has occurred since the last acknowledged event 1 Anew event has occurred since th
302. tus indicators and four terminals per output 1492 CABLEXW 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs Ve 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals per output and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0B8EI 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output es 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1756 0B8l N A 244 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G Table 65 IFMs and Prewired Cables continued 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable 1756 0B16D 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals een 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F F24D 2 Fusible Fused with 24V DC blown fuse low leakage status indicator circuit with four isolated groups and four terminals per output 1
303. tus of the module IMPORTANT Thetable lists all possible standard and diagnostic input module tags In each application the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 183 AppendixB Tag Definitions Table 33 Standard Input Module Configuration Tags Name Data Type Definition COSOnOffEn DINT Change of State On to Off Causes updated data to be sent to the controller immediately after an input for an On to Off 1bit per point transition of the masked input points The CST timestamp also is updated May be used to trigger an event task in the controller 0 Disable 1 Enable COSOffOnEn DINT Change of State Off to On Causes updated data to be sent to the controller immediately after an input for an Off to On 1 bit per point transition of the masked input points The CST timestamp also is updated May be used to trigger an event task in the controller 0 Disable 1 Enable Filter nOff 0 7 SINT Filter Times On to Off fFilter time for digital filter in digital input modules for On to Off transition Operates on groups 1 byte per group of eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 9 18 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms FilterOffOn_0_7 SINT Filter Times Off to On Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for Off to On transition Operates on groups 1 byte per group Table 34 Standard Input Module
304. u will use RSLogix 5000 software to complete the configuration The software uses default configurations such as RPI and filter times to get your I O module to communicate with its owner controller You can edit the default configuration as needed from the Module Properties dialog box Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 127 Chapter7 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Configuration Follow these steps to configure a ControlLogix digital I O module with Process Overview RSLogix 5000 software 1 Create a new module 2 Accept or customize the default configuration for the module 3 Edit the configuration as changes are needed Figure 20 Full Configuration Profile Diagram New Module 1 Choose a module from the list 2 Choose a Major Revision Naming Screen Name Slot number Communication Click a tab to customize the connection format Click OK to use the default configuration Minor revision configuration Keying choice Tabs ES gt OK Button Series of Application Specific Screens Configuration Complete Edit Configuration A series of tabs in RSLogix 5000 software enable you to change a module s configuration 41058 128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Configure ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 Create a New M
305. ue Input Data Timestamp Data output tag This function is useful for validating timestamping 0 The state of an input device is not being overridden 1 The state of an input device is being overridden by the value defined in the Pt x DataOverride output tag Pt x DataOverrideValue BOOL Override Data Value Defines the value to be applied to the input point when the Connection Data or Data with Event corresponding bit in the Pt x DataOverrideEn tag is enabled Input Data Timestamp Data 0 The input state is Off A timestamp is recorded in the Pt x Timestamp OnOff x input tag on a falling edge 1 The input state is On A timestamp is recorded in the Pt x Timestamp OffOn x input tag on a rising edge Event x Mask INT Event Mask When enabled for a point an event is triggered when the state ofthe input Connection Data with Event matches the value of the corresponding bits in the Event x Value tag For more Input Data Timestamp Data information see page 93 Event x Value INT Event Value Defines whether an input point must be in the On or Off state beforean Connection Data with Event event is triggered An event is only triggered if the corresponding bits in the Event x Mask Input ata Timestamp Data tag is enabled For more information see page 93 0 The input must be in the Off state to trigger an event 1 z The input must be in the On state to trigger an event Event x Disarm BOOL Disarm Event Prevents even
306. ule with module revision 2 1 The physical module is a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 3 2 In this case communication is allowed because the major revision of the physical module is higher than expected and the module determines that it is compatible with the prior major revision Module Configuration Vendor Allen Bradley EE Product Type Digital Input Module w rec Catalog Number 1756 IB16D E oos Major Revision 2 STREET e Minor Revision 1 Communication is allowed Physical Module Vendor Allen Bradley Product Type Digital Input Module Catalog Number 1756 IB16D Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 2 IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the 1 0 communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a loss of data Disabled Keying Disabled Keying indicates the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate with a module Other attributes such as data size and format are considered and must be acceptable before I O communication is established With Disabled Keying I O communication may occur with a module other than the type specified in the I O Configuration tree with unpredictable results We generally do not recommend using Disabled Keying incorrectly this option can lead to personal injury or death property damage ATTENTION Be extremely cautious when using Disabled Keying if used or economic
307. ules provide isolated or nonisolated wiring options I O modules provide point to point group to group or channel to channel wiring isolation Your specific application will determine what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use IMPORTANT Although some ControlLogix 1 0 modules provide nonisolated field side wiring options each 1 0 module maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side and field side Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Multiple Output Point Densities ControlLogix output modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application A point is the termination where a wire attaches to the I O module from a device The I O gets information from the device to this designated point thus signaling when activity occurs Electronic Fusing Some digital outputs have internal electronic or mechanical fusing to prevent too much current from flowing through the module This feature protects the module from electrical damage Other modules require external fusing Modules that use electronic fusing are fused on either a per point basis or per group basis to protect output points from the surge of too much current If too much current begins to flow through a point the fuse is tripped and a point level fault is sent to the controller A corresponding tag can be examined in the event of a fault For
308. ultValueStateDuration tag elapses and Point module is still faulted 1 Output turns On once the time in the FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses and module is still faulted ProgMode BOOL Program Mode Used in conjunction with the ProgValue tag to determine the state of Connection Data outputs when the controller is in Program mode Output Data Scheduled per 0 Uses the output value defined in the ProgValue tag default Point 1 Holds the last state of the output If PWM is enabled for the output point and the output is currently On the output will continue to use PWM until the cycle limit is reached ProgValue BOOL Program Value Defines the output state during Program mode Requires the Connection Data corresponding bit for the ProgMode tag to be cleared Output Data Scheduled per 0 The output state is Off during Program mode Point 1 The output state is On during Program mode FaultValueStateDuration SINT Fault State Duration Defines the length of time that the output state remains inthe Connection Data Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off The Fault mode stateis Output Data Scheduled per defined in the FaultValue tag Point Valid values e 0 Hold forever default Output remains in Fault mode for as long as the fault condition persists e 1 2 5 or 10 seconds PWM x Enable BOOL Enable PWM When set the pulse train for the output point is controlled by the current Connect
309. us indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F2 Fusible Extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F120 2 Extra terminals with 120V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F F240 2 Extra terminals with 240V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 XIM20120 8R Relay Master 20 pin master with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIM20120 16R 20 pin master with sixteen 120V AC relays 1492 XIM20120 16RF 20 pin master with sixteen 120V AC relays with fusing 1492 XIM120 8R Relay Expander Expander with eight 120V AC relays 1492 XIMF F120 2 Fusible Expander Expander with eight 120V channels with blown fuse indicators 1492 XIMF 2 Feed through Expander Expander with eight feed through channels 1756 0A16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY 1492 IFM40DS120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output Besse enu 1492 IFM40 FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40 FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1492 IFM40F FS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS240 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1756 0B8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard c 1492 IMF20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC sta
310. use an extended depth housing catalog number 1756 TBE For more information see page 120 118 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 Assemble the Removable Removable housing covers the wired RTB to protect wiring connections when the RTB is seated on the module Parts of the catalog number 1756 TBCH RTB example below are identified in the table Terminal Block and Housing 20858 M Item Description 1 Housing cover 2 Groove 3 Side edge of RTB 4 RTB 5 Strain relief area Follow these steps to attach the RTB to the housing 1 Align the grooves at the bottom of each side of the housing with the side edges of the RTB 2 Slide the RTB into the housing until it snaps into place IMPORTANT __ f additional wire routing space is required for your application use extended depth housing catalog number 1756 TBE Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 119 Chapter6 Install ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Choose Extended depth Housing 120 There are two housing options you must consider when wiring your ControlLogix digital I O module standard depth or extended depth When you order an RTB for your I O module you receive standard depth housing If your application uses heavy gauge wiring you can order extended depth housing Extended depth housing does not come with an RTB Standard depth Housing
311. ut modules e Owner controllers running low on connections IMPORTANT Rack optimized connections are available only to digital 1 0 modules However do not use a rack optimized connection for diagnostic 1 0 modules or fused output modules Diagnostic and fused output data will not be transferred over a rack optimized connection This defeats the purpose of using those modules In traditional I O systems controllers poll input modules to obtain their input status In the ControlLogix system a controller does not poll digital input modules Instead the modules multicast their data either upon change of state COS or requested packet interval RPI The frequency depends on the options chosen during configuration and whether the input module is local or remote This method of communication uses the Producer Consumer model The input module is the producer of input data and the controller is the consumer of the data All ControlLogix inputs are updated asynchronously in relation to the controller s task execution In other words an input may be updated in the controller at any time during the controller s execution of the tasks it is configured to run The input device determines when the input is sent based on its configuration An input module s behavior also varies depending upon whether it operates in the local chassis or in a remote chassis The following sections detail the differences in data transfers between local and remote inst
312. utput Data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value Rack Optimization The owner controller sends all digital output words to the remote chassis as a single rack image Listen Only Output Data Listen Only Rack Optimization These formats have the same definition as those above except that they are Listen only connections Module 1756 0A8 1756 0A161 1756 0B8 1756 0B8l 1756 0B16l 1756 081615 1756 0832 1756 0C8 1756 0616 1756 0H8l 1756 0N8 1756 OW16l 1756 0X8l CST Timestamped Fuse Data Output Data The owner controller sends the module only output data The module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the fuse is either blown or reset CST Timestamped Fuse Data Scheduled Output Data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value The module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the fuse is either blown or reset Listen Only CST Timestamped Fuse Data Output Data This choice has the same definition as CST timestamped fuse data output data except that it is a Listen only connection 1756 0A16 1756 0A8E 1756 0B16E 1756 OB8EI 1756 OV16E 1756 0V32E Full Diagnostics Output Data The owner controller sends the module only output data The module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics Ful
313. ve faults for those points during operation This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For information on these tags see Chapter A Follow these steps to enable or disable diagnostics for field power loss 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab E Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8E 3 1 Enable Diag Latching M M M M M iv i iv i iv Li iv Li lv L v Ile le e la lal If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode f Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Communications Failure 2 Doone of the following in the Enable Diagnostics for Field Power Loss column e To enable field power loss detection for a specific point check the corresponding check box e To disable field loss detection for a specific point clear the corresponding checkbox 3 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Common Module Features Chapter 3 Diagnostic Latch of Information The diagnostic latch feature is available for the 1756 OAS8E modules only Diagnostic latching allows this module to latch a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears Follow these steps to enable diagnostic latch of information 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Con
314. vember 2012 Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8 1756 0A8 ControlLogix AC 74 265V output module Simplified Schematic 5V 11 0 ME EE 1 0 OUT 0 Been ee V 1 0 OUTA Yo i mw JD KD ME i OUT 0 1 0 d IED 1 ControlLogix Backplane Interface B 7 1 0 1 p OUT 3 Display ED D 1 0 Not used Surge Current Chart Es fe L1 1 OUTA 20A Surge d vs EB ID ons 5 Lt 1 IEB IES OUT 6 Group 1 L1 1 IEB ig OUT 7 1 ie 0 43 ms Time Daisy Chain Other RTBs Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 153 Chapter8 Wiring Diagrams 1756 0A8D ControlLogix AC 74 132V diagnostic output module Simplified Schematic 1756 0A8D Diagnostic Control Block with Opto j ControlLogix and Transformer Isolation L1 Not Used 12 0 Backplane wc t Ko o Interface Y EN L1 0 1 1 OUT 0 Short GATE 24 o D E Group 0 H H lt Verify AE pur i d XD D m No Load O q i
315. ver the backplane This time reflects a filter time of 0 ms fora DC input This section offers an explanation ofthe time limitations with ControlLogix I O modules Input Modules As shown in the illustration below ControlLogix input modules receive a signal at the RTB and process it internally through hardware filters and an ASIC scan before sending a signal to the backplane via the requested packet interval RPI or at a Change of State COS occurrence The RPI is a configured interval of time that determines when a module s data is sent to the controller Hardware Delay Filter Delay ASIC Delay l Signal Sent to the Backplane Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 21 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System The table defines some of the delay factors that affect the signal propagation on an I O module Delay Hardware Description How the module is configured and the variance between the type of modules affects how the signal is processed Filter User configuration varies between modules thus affecting the signal propagation ASIC EXAMPLE ASIC scan 200 ps Atypical delay time can be estimated despite the number of factors that might contribute For example if you are turning on a 1756 IB16 module at 24V DC in 25 C 77 F conditions the signal propagation delay is affected by these factors e Hardware d
316. well Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone en html or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A S Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 ere
317. wner controller 8 least as often as RPI L E 9 ControlNet Network 42675 The reserved spot on the network and the output data sent by the controller are asynchronous to each other This means there are best and worst case scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive updated data from the module in a remote chassis Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the best case scenario the owner controller sends the output data just before the reserved network slot is made available In this case the remote output module receives the data almost immediately Rockwell Automation Publication 1756 UM058G EN P November 2012 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the worst case scenario the owner controller sends the output data just after the reserved network slot has passed In this case the output module does not receive data until the next available network slot IMPORTANT These best and worst case scenarios indicate the time required for output data to transfer from the owner controller to the module once the owner controller has produced it They do not take into account the user program time in the owner controller The receipt of new data is a function of the length of the user program and its asynchronous relationship with the RPI The owner controller updates remote output modules at the end
318. work The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI But the control system will guarantee that the owner controller will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI As shown in the illustration below the input data within the remote chassis is multicast at the configured RPI The ControlNet communication module sends input data back to the owner controller at least as often as the RPI Figure 3 Remote Input Modules on ControlNet Network Remote Chassis OOED o 000 ooo ooo 2000 200 en Multicast Data ooo e NY lt ControlNet Network The module s RPI and reserved spot on the network are asynchronous to each other This means there are best and worst case scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive updated data from the module in a remote chassis 40947 Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the best case scenario the module performs an RPI multicast with updated channel data just before the reserved network slot is made available In this case the remotely located owner receives the data almost immed

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules User Manual, 1756-UM058G-EN-P

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents